As 1720 1988 Part 1 Timber Structures 3

This Australian Standard was prepared by Committee
Committee TM/102, timber En gineering.

gineering. It
was approved on behalf of the Council of the Standards Association of Australia on
21 April 1988 and published on 15 July 1988.
The following interests are represented on Committee TM/102:

Australian
Australian British Chamber of Commerce
Commerce
Australian
Australian Federation
Federation of Timber Merchants
Merchants Associations
Australian Institute of Building
Australian
Australian Timber Importers’ Federation
Federation
CSIRO, Division of Construction and Engineering
Department of Forestry, Qld
Electricity
Electricity Supply Association
Association of Australia
Australia
Forest Products
Products Association,
Association, W.A.
Forestry
Forestry Commission
Commission of N.S.W.
N.S.W.
Master Builders Federation of Australia
National Association of Australian State Road Authorities
New South Wales Timber Advisory Council
Public Works Department, New South Wales
Radiata Pine Researc
Research
h Institute Inc.
Rail Track and Sleeper Association
Railways
Railways of Australia
Australia Committee
Committee
Royal Australian Institute of Architects
Tasmanian Timber Promotion Board
The Association
Association of Consulting
Consulting Engineers Australia
Timber Merchants Association of South Australia
Timber Merchants Association of Victoria
Timber Preservers Association
Association of Australia
Australia
Timber Promotion Council
Timber Research and Development Advisory Council
Timber and Building Material
Material Merchants
Merchants Association,
Association, N.S.W
Universities
Universities and colleges
colleges
Victorian S awmillers
awmillers Association
Association
Woods and Forests Department, S.A
Additional interests
interests participating
participating in preparation
preparation of Standard:
Standard:
Australian
Australian Timber Research
Research institute Inc.
Australian
Australian Uniform Building Regulations
Regulations Co-ordinating Council
Rev iew of Austr alia n Standa rds. To keep abreast of progress in industry, Australian
Australian Standards are subject
to periodic review and are kept up to date by the issue of amendments or new editions as necessary. It is
important therefore that Standards users ensure that they are in possession of the latest edition, and any
amendments thereto.
Full details of all Australian Standards and related publications will be found in the Standards Australia
Catalogue of Publications; this information is supplemented each month by the magazine ‘The Australian
Standard’, which subscribing members receive, and which gives details of new publications, new editions
and amendments, and of withdrawn Standards.
Suggestions for improvements to Australian Standards, addressed to the head office of Standards Australia,
Australia,
are welcomed. Notification of any inaccuracy or ambiguity found in an Australian
Australian Standard should be made
without delay in order that the matter may be investigated and appropriate action taken.
This Standard was issued in draft form for comment as DR 83171.

AS 1720.1—1988
Australian Standard®
SAA TIMBER STRUCTURES CODE

Part 1—DESIGN METHODS
First
First published
published as AS CA65—1972.
Revised
Revised and redesignated
redesignated AS 1720—1975.
Revised
Revised and redesignated AS 1720.1—1988.
1720.1—1988.
Incorporating:
Amdt 1—1993
PUBLISHED
PUBLISHED BY ST ANDARDS
ANDARDS AUSTRALIA
(STANDARDS
(STANDARDS ASSOCIATION
ASSOCIATION OF AUSTRALIA)
AUSTRALIA)
1 THE CRESCENT, HOMEBUSH, NSW 2140
ISBN 0 7262 5090 2
AS 1720.1—1988 2
PREFACE
This Standard was prepared by the Association’s Committee on Timber Engineering

to supersede AS 1720—1975, SAA Timber Engineering
Engineering Code.
In considering the revision of AS 1720—1975 the committee decided
decided that it would be
appropriate if its subject matter and other material to be included in the revision was
divided into four parts as follows:
Part 1: Design methods (this Standard)
Standard)
Part 2: Timber properties (in course of preparation)
Part 3: Non-standard connectors (in course of preparation
Part 4: structures (in course of preparation)
Fire resistance of timer structures
While
While this Standard
Standard is primaril
primarilyy concer
concerned
ned with design methods
methods,, it also
also contai
contains
ns
structural design properties for a modest range of timber species and metal connectors.
Sectio
Sectionn 1 deals
deals with
with general
general matter
matterss such
such as definitions
definitions and conditio
conditions
ns for the
application of this Standard. Design rules are given in Sections 2 to 7, with Section 2
containing the basic structural design properties of timber essential to the use of the
Standard.
Normal procedure for users is to note the general requirements of Section 1, obtain the
basic
basic struc
structur
tural
al desig
design
n prope
properti
rties
es from
from Secti
Section
on 2 and
and then
then to proce
proceed
ed to one
one of
Sections 3 to 7 depending on th type of element being designed.
In general, the simpler
simpler design situations are covered
covered in the main body o f the t ext, and
acceptable procedures for detailed design situations are given in the related appendices.
appendices.
For ease of use the appendices
appendices correlate
correlate sequentially
sequentially with the sections
sections of the text, i.e.
Appendices
Appendices A, B, C etc are related to the Sections 1, 2, 3, etc, in the main body of this
text. It should be noted that Appendix A gives rules for the acceptance of timber
structures based on proof and prototype testing.
The appendices, which form an integral part of this Standard, have been drafted in
mandatory terms to facilitate cross reference by Regulatory Authorities.
Design information
information for timber piles which was included in the previous edition of this
Standard is now provided in AS 2159, SAA Piling Code.
© Copyright STANDARDS
STANDARDS AUSTRAL
AUSTRALIA
IA
Users of Standards
Standards are reminded
reminded that copyright subsists
subsists in all Standards
Standards Austral
Australia
ia publications
publications and software. Except where the
Copyright Act allows and except where provided for below no publications or software produced by Standards Australia may be
reproduc
reproduced,
ed, stored
stored in a retrie
retrieval
val system
system in any form
form or transm
transmitt
itted
ed by any means without
without prior permiss
permission
ion in writin
writing
g from
from
Standards Australia. Permission may be conditional on an appropriate royalty payment. Requests for permission and information on
commercial
commercial software
software royalties
royalties should be directed
directed to the head office of Standards
Standards Australia.
Australia.
Standa
Standards
rds Austral
Australia
ia will
will permit
permit up to 10 percent
percent of the technica
technicall content
content pages of a Standa
Standard
rd to be copied
copied for use
exclusively
exclusively in-house
in-house by purchasers
purchasers of the Standard
Standard without
without payment of a royalty
royalty or advice to Standards
Standards Australia.
Australia.
Standards Australia will also permit the inclusion of its copyright material in computer software programs for no royalty
payment provided
provided such programs are used exclusively
exclusively in-house
in-house by the creators of the programs.
Care should be taken to ensure that material used is from the current edition of the Standard and that it is updated whenever the
Standard
Standard is amended or revised. The number and date of the Standard
Standard should therefore be clearly
clearly identified.
identified.
The use of materi
material
al in print form or in compute
computerr softwa
software
re programs
programs to be used commerci
commerciall
ally,
y, with
with or without
without payment,
payment, or in
commercial
commercial contracts is subject to the payment of a royalty. This policy may be varied by Standards Australi
Australiaa at any time.
3 AS 1720.1—1988
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION
SECTION 1. SCOPE
SCOPE AND
AND GENERAL
GENERAL
1 .1 SCO PE
PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . 5
1 .2
.2 R EF
EF ER
ERE NC
NCE D DO CU CU MEME NTNT S . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. 5
1 .3
.3 N EW
EW MAMAT ER
ER IAIA LS
LS A ND ND ME ME THTHO DS DS . . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . 5
1 .4
.4 T IM
IM BE
BE R QU ALAL IT
IT Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . 5
1.5
1.5 GENE
GENERA RALL DES
DESIG IGN N CON
CONSI SIDE
DERARATIOTIONS NS . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 5
1 .6
.6 D ES
ES IG
IG N A ND
ND SU SUP ERER VIVI SI
SI ON
ON . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. 6
1.7
1.7 WORK
WORKMA MANSNSHIHIPP AND
AND MAI MAINT NTENENAN ANCE CE . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 7
1 .8 DE FI
FINIT IO
IONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . 7
1 .9 NOT ATAT IO
IO N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . 7
1 .1
.1 0 UN
UNI TS
TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . 7
SECTION
SECTION 2. BASIC
BASIC PROPERTIES
PROPERTIES OF
OF STRUCTURA
STRUCTURAL
L TIMBER
TIMBER
2 .1 GE NE
NE RA
RAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2
2.2 STRU
STRUCTCTUR
URAL
AL CLASS
CLASSIF IFIC
ICATATIOIONSNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3
2.3 BASIC
BASIC WORKI
WORKING NG STRESS
STRESSES ES AND MODUL MODULUS US OF ELASTI
ELASTICIT CITY Y 8
2 .4 DE SI
SIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 .5
.5 MO DI
DI FI
FI CA
CAT IO
IO N FA CT CT OROR S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SECTION
SECTION 3. DESIGN
DESIGN OF BASIC
BASIC STRUCTUR
STRUCTURAL
AL MEMBERS
MEMBERS
3 .1 GE NE
NE RA
RAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. 18
3 .2 BE AM
AM DE DE SI
SIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. . 18
3 .3
.3 C OL
OL UM
UMN DE DE SI
SI GN
GN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. 21
3 .4
.4 T EN
EN SI
SI ON
ON ME
ME MB
MB ER
ER D ESESI GN
GN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. 22
3.5
3.5 COMB
COMBIN INED
ED BENDI
BENDINGNG ANDAND AXI AXIAL AL STRSTRES ESSESES S . .. .. .. .. .. 22
SECTION
SECTION 4. CONNEC
CONNECTION
TIONS
S
4 .1 GE NE
NE RA
RAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. 23
4 .2 NAI LE
LE D JOI NT
NT S . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. 23
4 .3
.3 S CR
CR EW
EWE D JOI NTNT S . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . 26
4 .4
.4 B OL
OL TE
TE D JO IN
INT S . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. 27
4 .5
.5 C OA
OA CH
CH SCSC R
REE WS
WS . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. 36
4 .6
.6 S PL
PL IT
IT -R
-R IN
ING CO
CON NE
NE CTCT OR
OR S . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . 37
4 .7
.7 S HE
HE AR
AR P PLL AT
AT E C ON
ONN ECECT OR OR S . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . 37
SECTION
SECTION 5. PLYWOOD
PLYWOOD
5 .1 GE NE
NE RA
RAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. 40
5.2
5.2 BASI
BASIC C WOR
WORKI KING
NG STRE
STRESS SSESES AND
AND STIF STIFFNFNESSESS . .. .. .. .. .. 40
5 .3 DE SI
SIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. 40
5 .4
.4 MO DI
DI FI
FI CA
CAT IO
IO N FA CT CT OROR S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . 40
5 .5 JOI NT
NT S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. 40
SECTION
SECTION 6. ROUND
ROUND TIMBERS
TIMBERS
6 .1 GE NE
NE RA
RAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. 43
6.2
6.2 BASI
BASIC C WOR
WORKIKING
NG STRE
STRESS SSESES AND
AND STIF STIFFNFNESSESS . .. .. .. .. .. 43
6 .3 DE SI
SIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. 43
6.4
6.4 ADDI
ADDITITION
ONAL
AL MODI
MODIFI FICA
CATI TIONON FACT
FACTOR ORS S . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. 43
6 .5
.5 D ES
ES IG
IG N D ET
ET AI
AI LS
LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. 43
SECTION 7. GLUED-LAMINATED
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION
7 .1 GE NE
NE RA
RAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . .. 45
7 .2 DE SI
SIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. 45
7 .3
.3 MO DI
DI FI
FI CA
CAT IO
IO N FA CT CT OROR S . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 45
7 .4
.4 O TH
TH ER
ER RE
RE QU
QU IR
IR EM
EME NT NT S . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. 45
AS 1720.1—1988 4
Page
APPENDICES
A A CC
CC EP
EP TA
TA NC
NC E T ESES TITI NG
NG OF T IM IMB ERER ST RU RUC TU TU RE
RE S AN D
E LE
LE ME
ME NT
NT S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
B BASI
BASIC C DESI
DESIGNGN PROP
PROPER ERTIE
TIES S OF STRUC
STRUCTU TURA RAL L TIMB
TIMBER ER . . . 52
C D ES
ES IG
IG N O F B AS
AS IC
IC S TR
TR UC
UC TUTUR AL AL ME ME MBMB ERER S . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
D JOI NT
NT S I N T IM
IMB ER
ER S TRTRU CT CT UR
UR ESES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
E BUCK
BUCKLI LING
NG STRENG
STRENGTH TH OF PLYW PLYWOO OOD D DIAP
DIAPHR HRAG AGMS MS . . . . . 71
F C ON
ON NE
NE CT
CT IO
ION S F OR
OR RO RO UN
UND TI TI MB
MB ER ER S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
G GLUED-LAM
GLUED-LAMINAT INATEDED CONSTRU
CONSTRUCTION CTION—SP —SPECIA ECIAL L CONDITI
CONDITIONS ONS 77
H REFER
REFERENCENCEDED AND
AND RELA
RELATED TED DOCUDOCUME MENT NTS S .. .. ... .. ... . 79
I NOT ATAT IO
IO N AND FA FA CT
CT OROR S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
I ND
ND EX
EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5 AS 1720.1—1988
STANDARDS ASSOCIATION OF AUSTRALIA
Australian
Australian Standard
Standard
TIMBER STRUCTURES
STRUCTURES
PART 1: DESIGN
DESIGN METHOD
METHODS
S
SECTION
SECTION 1. SCOPE
SCOPE AND GENERA
GENERAL
L
1.1 SCOPE. This Standard sets out the design methods (c) Stress
Stress grade and species
species identificati on. Structural
identification.
for the structural use of timber which are based on the timber used in conjunction with this Standard shall
principles
principles of structural
structural mechanics
mechanics and on data established
established have its stress grade identified.
by resear
research.
ch. The Standa
Standardrd is intend
intended
ed for use in the For
For many
many purp
purpos
oses
es it may
may also
also be nece
necess
ssar
ary
y to
design or appraisal of structural elements comprised of spec
specif
ify
y a part
partic
icul
ular
ar spec
specie
ies.
s. When
When a parti
particu
cula
larr
timber
timber or wood
wood produc
productsts and of struct
structure
uress compri
comprised
sed species
species is specified
specified the specificati
specification
on shall require
require
subs
substa
tant
ntia
iall
lly
y of timb
timber
er.. To this
this end,
end, the
the Stan
Standa
dard
rd that all pieces of timber be suitably identified as to
provides design data for sawn timber, laminated timber, species.
timb
timber
er in pole
pole form
form,, plyw
plywoo ood
d and
and vari
variou
ouss type
typess of
fastenings
fastenings.. In addition,
addition, it provides
provides methods
methods of test for NOTES:
1. The design
design propert
properties
ies recomme
recommende
nded
d in this
this Standa
Standard
rd have
have
compon
componententss or assemb
assemblie
liess of unconv
unconvent
ention
ional
al design
design been chosen on the assumption that structures of unseasoned
which may not be readily amenable to detailed
detailed analysis.
analysis. timber that are allowed to dry will not receive their full design
load until a period of air drying for at least 2 weeks has taken
For ease of use, the simpler design situations are covered place.
place. Freshl
Freshly
y sawn
sawn timber
timber which is unseas
unseasone
oned,
d, or has
in the main body of the text. Related appendices, which recently been treated with waterborne chemicals, tends to have
form
form an integr
integral
al part of the Standa
Standard,
rd, give accept
acceptabl
ablee a reduced resistance and stiffness to sustained loads during the
procedures
procedures for detailed
detailed design situations.
situations. initial
initial drying period.
2. Usuall
Usually,y, only a limite
limitedd number
number of the timber
timber species
species and
stress grades listed in this Standard will be readily available at
1.2 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. A list with titles any particular place and time.
of the documents referred to in this Standard is given in (d) Change of grade or durability. Care shall be taken
Appendix H. to accoun
accountt for any change
change in origin
original
al gradin
grading
g or
pres
preser
erva
vati
tive
ve treat
treatme
ment
nt as a resu
result
lt of sawi
sawing
ng or
1.3
1.3 NEW
NEW MATE MATERI RIAL
ALS S AND
AND METH
METHOD ODS. S. This dressing.
dressing. Regrading
Regrading will be necessary
necessary if members
members
Standard shall not be interpreted to prevent the use of are longitudinal
longitudinally
ly resawn.
resawn. Machining
Machining may remove
materi
material
al or of method
methodss of design
design or constr
construct
uction
ion not preser
preservat
vative
ive envelo
envelopes
pes render
rendering
ing the treatm
treatment
ent
specifically referred to herein. Nor is the classification of ineffective.
timb
timber
erss into
into stre
streng
ngth
th grou
groups
ps (Cla
(Claus
usee 1.4)
1.4) or thei
theirr
grouping for joint design (Clause 4.1) to be interpreted (e) Special provisions. Design
Design loads
loads for timber
timber joints
joints
as precluding the use of design stresses or other design and design rules for notched
notched beams given herein are
data derived
derived for a particular
particular timber or grade of timber on base
basedd on the
the assu
assump
mptio
tion
n that
that ther
theree are
are no loos
loosee
the basis of authoritative research information. knots, severe sloping grain, gum veins, gum or rot
pockets,
pockets, lyctus-susc
lyctus-susceptibl
eptiblee sapwood,
sapwood, holes or splits
NOTE:
NOTE: It usually
usually will
will be necess
necessary
ary to seek
seek approval
approval from the
Building Authority or other appropriate Regulatory Authority for the
in the near vicinity
vicinity of any connectors
connectors or notch roots.
roots.
use of new materials or methods. (f) Treated timber. Timber,
Treated timber. Timber, treate
treated
d by impreg
impregnat
nation
ion
with waterborne chemicals such as preservatives, is
1.4 TIMBER
TIMBER QUALITY.
QUALITY. All timber used in accordance classified as unseasoned timber unless seasoning is
with this Standard shall comply with the requirements of specified.
appropriate Australian Standards. The following points
shall be noted: NOTE:
NOTE: Where
Where the materi
material
al is reseas
reseasoned
oned,, regradi
regrading
ng would
would
normally
normally be required.
(a) General. Tables 2.1 and 2.2 herein and AS 1720.2,
list
list common
common specie
speciess used
used for struct
structura
urall purpos
purposes
es 1.5 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS.
together with their strength classifications and design
1.5.1
1.5.1 Loads
Loads..
density.
1.5.1.1 General. A struc tructu
ture
re,, and
and any partpart of a
(b) Timber classification. Timber species are classified
struct
structure
ure,, shall
shall be design
designed
ed for the loads
loads specif
specified
ied in
into seven strength groups S1 to S7 in the
AS 1170 or such other loading
loading Standard
Standard as is appropriate
appropriate
unseasoned condition and eight strength groups SD1
to the
the end-
end-ususee of a spec
specif
ific
ic stru
struct
ctur
uree or part
part of a
to SD8 in the seasoned condition. The timber species
structure.
are also classified into six joint groups J1 to J6 if
used unseasoned, and JD1 to JD6 if used seasoned. 1.5.1.2 Load duration. The significance of duration of
Sawn structural timber, pole timbers and plywood loading in the design of timber structures shall be noted
are classified into 12 stress grades F2 to F34 when and particul
particular
ar attent
attention
ion paid to the term ‘durat
‘duration
ion of
these have been graded according
according to the appropriate
appropriate loading’. (For the definition of this term see Clause 1.8.2
grading
grading Standard
Standard or other approved
approved specificat
specification.
ion. and for further information Clause 2.5.1.)
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 6
1.5.2 Design methods. dama

damagege or unsi
unsigh
ghtl
tly
y appe
appear
aran
ance
cess resu
result
ltin
ing
g from
from
1.5.2.1 General. A structure, or part of a structure, or differential movement on structural members caused by
an indivi
individua
duall struct
structura
urall elemen
elementt shall
shall be capabl
capablee of timber shrinkage. These comments also apply to timber
sustaining the most adverse likely combination of loads. which has been impregnated
impregnated with waterborne chemicals
chemicals
Every part of the structure shall be proportioned so that and which has not been reseasoned after treatment.
the permissible stresses determined in accordance with NOTE: For most timbers the magnitude of shrinkage is in the range
of 0.1% to 0.3% in the
the direction of the wood
wood grain and 2% to 10%
this Standard are not exceeded. transverse
transverse to this direction. Information
Information on shrinkage
shrinkage for specific
NOTE: Some of the clauses of this Standard
Standard have been simplified
simplified as species can be obtained from:
far as prac
practi
tica
cabl
blee to permi
permitt rapi
rapid
d calc
calcul
ulat
atio
ion
n and
and may
may as a (a)
(a) KING
KINGST STON
ON,, R.S.
R.S.T.
T. and RISDO
RISDON N C.J.
C.J.E.
E. ‘Shri
‘Shrink
nkage
age and
conse
consequ
quen
encece invol
involve
ve some
some degre
degreee of cons
conser
erva
vati
tism
sm.. Wher
Wheree Density of Australian and Other South-west Pacific Woods’.
approp
appropri
riat
ate,
e, more
more refin
refined
ed desi
design
gn meth
methods
ods are
are give
given
n in the
the Divisi
Division
on of Forest
Forest Product
Productss Technol
Technologic
ogical
al Paper
Paper No 13,
appendices which form an integral part of this Standard. CSIRO, 1961.
1.5.2.2 Stress analysis. All stresses shall be calculated (b) BUDGEN,
BUDGEN, B. ‘Shrinka
‘Shrinkage
ge and Density
Density of some Australia
Australian
n and
and
South-east
South-east Asian Timbers’.
Timbers’. Division
Division of Building
Building Research
Research
on the
the bas
basis of elas
elasti
ticc theo
theory
ry in orde
orderr tha
that the
the Technological Paper (Second Series) No 38, CSIRO, 1981.
requ
requir
irem
emen
ents
ts of this
this code
code in regaregard
rd to permi
permiss
ssib
ible
le
1.5.3.6 Deformations. Timber structures
structures shallbe designed
designed
stresses may be satisfied with regard to the load effects
so that deformations
deformations incurred
incurred in-service
in-service do not impair the
at any
any part
partic
icul
ular
ar loca
locati
tion
on.. For
For exam
examplplee the
the appl
applie
ied
d
strength and serviceability of the structures or any part
bending
bending moment
moment M and shear shear force
force V on a beam of
thereof, nor cause damage to other building components.
rectangular
rectangular cross-section
cross-section shall be checked
checked by—
Timber members shall have sufficient stiffness so that
M ≤ (bd 2 /6)F b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1.1
(1.1)) undesirable deflections and vibrations are avoided.
V ≤ (2bd /3)F s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1.2
(1.2)) NOTES:
where 1. The responsibili
responsibility
ty for deflection and stiffness
stiffness limits should rest
rest
with the design engineer.
b and d = the breadth
breadth and depth
depth of the member
member 2. In computi
computingng design
design deflecti
deflections
ons,, it should be apprec
appreciat
iated
ed that
that
F b and F s = the
the perm
permis
issi
sibl
blee desi
design
gn stre
stress
sses
es in timber
timber is variab
variable
le with
with respec
respectt to its struct
structural
ural propertie
properties.
s. It
bending and shear. should also be noted that the moduli given in Table 2.3 refer to
design values for groups of timber. If for some reason (e.g. to
When
When severa
severall materi
materials
als are glued
glued togeth
togetherer to form
form a specify camber) accurate predictions of deflection are required,
structural element, stresses may be calculated from an detailed
detailed information relevant to the specific species of timber
under consideration should be used.
equivalent transformed section, where the transformation
is made with respect to the moduli of elasticity. 1.5.3.7 Timber dimensions for engineering calculations.
All
All engi
engine
neer
erin
ing
g calc
calcul
ulat
atio
ions
ns shal
shalll be base
based
d on the
the
1.5.2.3 Experimentally based design. Where a structure minimum net cross-section. Such calculations shall not
or a stru
struct
ctur
ural
al elem
elemen
entt is of an unco
unconv
nven
entio
tiona
nall or be based on the nominal cross-section.
complex nature, and it is demonstrated by the full-scale
tests
tests specif
specified
ied in Append
Appendixix A that
that requir
requireme
ements
nts for 1.5.3.8 Timber natural pole form. For logs or poles
Timber in natural
strength,
strength, deformation,
deformation, stability and serviceabili
serviceability
ty are complying with the quality requirements of AS 2209, the
satisfied, the corresponding design requirements of this corres
correspon
ponden
dence
ce betwee
between
n streng
strength
th groups
groups and stress
stress
Standard shall be deemed also to have been satisfied. grades is as shown in Table 6.1.
1.5.3 Other design considerations. 1.5.3.9 Biological deterioration. Generally, timber under
cover and in well ventilated conditions and not in contact
1.5.3.1 Stability. The stability of the structure
structure as a whole with the ground or free water, is not subject to fungal
shall be investigated, and mass and anchorage shall be attack. However, such timber may be subject to termite
provided so that the structure is in overall equilibrium. attack and to attack by other insects in parts of Australia.
NOTE: Suitable recommendations for this purpose will be given in If conditions favourable for biological attack exist, then
AS 1170.1. steps
steps shall
shall be taken
taken to elimin
eliminate
ate the hazard
hazards.s. This is
1.5.3.2 Buckling restraints. Where there may be some particularly important in structures where there is no load
doubt
doubt as to the effect
effective
ivenes
nesss of buckli
buckling
ng restra
restraint
ints,
s, sharing capacity, e.g. large trusses.
approp
appropria
riate
te comput
computati
ations
ons,, such
such as those
those indica
indicated
ted in
Paragraph C7, Appendix C, shall be made to check the 1.6 DESIGN AND SUPERVISION.
stiffness and strength of the restraints. 1.6.1 Design. The design of timber structures to which
1.5.3.3 Erection and other extraneous forces. Adequate this
this Standa
Standard
rd applie
applies,
s, includ
including
ing the specif
specifica
icatio
tion
n of
provis
provision
ion shall be made to resist
resist the lateral
lateral and other
other materials and any protective treatment, shall be carried
forces that can occur during the transport of structural out in accordance with the requirements of this Standard
elements, and during and after the erection of a structure. and the relevant documents in Appendix H.
NOTE:
NOTE: The design
design of a struct
structure
ure complying
complying with
with this
this Standa
Standard
rd
1.5.3.4 Secondary stresses. Careful
Secondary stresses. Careful considerati
consideration
on shall be should be the responsibility of a design engineer experienced in the
given to possible secondary stresses. Where these cannot design of such structures.
be reduced to negligible proportions, suitable provisions 1.6.2 Supervision. The fabrication and erection of the
in the design or some reduction in permissible primary timber structures or the parts of structures to which this
stresses shall be made. Standard applies shall be supervised to ensure that all of
1.5.3.5 Shrinkage. When
When using
using unseas
unseasone
onedd timber
timber,, the
the requ
require
ireme
ment
ntss of the
the desi
design
gn are
are sati
satisf
sfie
ied
d in the
the
consideration shall be given to the effects of shrinkage. completed structure.
Detailing
Detailing of the joints shall
shall not restrain shrinkage
shrinkage where NOTE:
NOTE: The superv
supervisi
ision
on of fabric
fabricati
ation
on and erecti
erection
on of timber
timber
splitting could render the joint ineffective. Consideration structures
structures should be the responsibility
responsibility of a supervision
supervision engineer
experienced in the fabrication and erection of such structures.
shall
shall also
also be given
given to archit
architect
ectura
urall detail
detailing
ing to avoid
avoid
COPYRIGHT
7 AS 1720.1—1988
1.7 WORKMANSHIP AND MAINTENANCE. long-d

long-dura
uratio
tion
n loadin
loading,
g, grade
grade of timber,
timber, and a safety
safety
1.7.1 General. The following requirements are intended factor.
to help
help ensur
nsuree that
that a stru
struccture
ture or elem
elemen
entt when
when Collapse-s
Collapse-suscep
usceptible timber —tim
tible timber — timbeberr for
for whic
whichh the
the
fabr
fabric
icat
ated
ed perf
perform
orms,s, and
and will
will cont
contin
inue
ue to perf
perfor
orm,
m, shrinkage
shrinkage values
values before and after reconditionin
reconditioning
g differ by
structurall
structurally
y in the manner
manner intended
intended by the designer of the more than 2 percent.
structure. NOTE: Information on shrinkage values can be obtained from:
1.7.2 Moisture
Moisture content.
content. When structures or elements are (a)
(a) KING
KINGST
STONON,, R.S
R.S.T
.T.. and
and RIS
RISDO
DONN C.J
C.J.E
.E.. ‘Sh
‘Shri
rinka
nkage
ge and
and
to be fabricated with seasoned timber in situations where Densit
Density
y of Austra
Australia
lian
n and Other
Other South-w
South-west est Pacifi
Pacificc
dimens
dimension
ional
al stabil
stability
ity is critic
critical,
al, the design
designer
er of the Woods’. Division
Division of Forest
Forest Products Technological
Technological Paper
No 13, CSIRO, 1961.
structure shall ascertain the average equilibrium moisture
moisture (b) BUDGEN
BUDGEN,, B. ‘Shrin
‘Shrinkage
kage and Densit
Density
y of some
some Austra
Australia
lian
n
content for the environment in which the structures or and South-ea
South-eastst Asian
Asian Timber
Timbers’.
s’. Divisi
Division
on of Buildi
Building
ng
elements are to be erected, and shall specify that each Resear
Research
ch Technol
Technologic
ogical
al Paper
Paper (Second
(Second Series
Series)) No 38,
piece
piece of timber
timber used shall
shall have
have an averag
averagee moistu
moisture
re CSIRO, 1981.
content at the time of fabrication that is within 3 percent Corewood —timber
—timber adjacent to or including the pith, that
of the equilibrium value. is of density less than 80 percent that of the density of
NOTES: mature trees.
1. Defini
Definitio
tions
ns used in this Standar
Standardd for the moisture
moisture content
content of
NOTE: For plantation
plantation grown softwoods,
softwoods, corewood
corewood may be avoided
avoided
seasoned and unseasoned timber are given in Clause 1.8.2. For
by excluding all timber within a radius of 50 mm from the pith, that
interm
intermedi
ediate
ate values
values of moistu
moisture
re content
content,, the term
term ‘parti
‘partiall
ally
y
has a ring width greater than 6 mm.
seasoned timber’ will be used.
2. Information
Information on equilibrium moisture content
content values in timbers Duration of loading—period during which a member, a
loca
locate
ted
d in Aust
Austral
ralia
ia can
can be obtai
obtaine
ned
d from
from the
the follow
followin
ingg structural element or a complete structure is stressed as
references:
a consequence of the loads applied.
(a) FINIGH
FINIGHAN,
AN, R. ‘Moistu
‘Moisture
re Content
Content Predict
Predictions
ions for
for Eight
Eight
Seasoned
Seasoned Timbers under Sheltered Outdoor Conditions
Conditions in NOTES:
Australia
Australia and New Guinea’. Division of Forest Products
Products 1. For the purpose
purposess of interpr
interpreta
etatio
tion
n in the use of load-du
load-durat
ration
ion
Technological Paper No 44, CSIRO, 1966. factors in this Standard, see Clause 2.5.1.
(b) BRAGG, C. ‘An ‘An Equilibr
Equilibrium
ium Moisture
Moisture Content Survey of 2. The strength
strength properties
properties of timber under load are time dependent.
dependent.
Timb
Timberer in Quee
Queensnsla
land’
nd’.. Quee
Queens
nsla
land
nd Depa
Departrtme
ment
nt of In-grade verification — veri verific
ficat
atio
ion
n of the
the desi
design
gn
Forestry Technical Paper No 40, QFD, 1986.
proper
propertie
tiess assign
assigned
ed to stress
stress graded
graded timber.
timber. Where
Where
1.7.3 Corrosion. The designer of the structure
structure shall take appl
applic
icab
able
le,, thes
thesee prop
proper
erti
ties
es shal
shalll be eval
evalua
uate
ted
d in
due account of any possible corrosive effects on metal accordance with AS 4063.
connectors.
NOTE: Where AS 4063 is employed to assign design design properties
properties to
NOTE: Information on the protection of steel can be obtained from stress
stress graded timber
timber,, the stress
stress grading
grading procedu
procedures
res should
should be
AS 2312. subjected
subjected to a continuing quality-contr
quality-control
ol program.
1.7.4 Maintenance. Where in the opinion of the designer Permissible stress —maximum stress to be used in the
of a stru
struct
ctur
uree spec
specia
iall main
mainte
tena
nanc
ncee is requ
requir
ired
ed for
for a design of an element of a structure. It is obtained from
struc
structu
ture
re to fulf
fulfil
il its
its inte
intend
nded
ed func
functi
tion
on,, then
then such
such the basic working stress appropriately modified for the
maintenance shall be specified in relevant documents. type of structure and service conditions.
Seasoned timber —wood
Seasoned timber —wood in which
which the maximu
maximumm moistu
moisture
re
1.8 DEFINITIONS. For the purpos
purposee of this
this Standa
Standard,
rd, cont
conten
entt anyw
anywhe
here
re with
within
in a piec
piecee does
does not
not exce
exceed
ed
the definitions given in AS 01 and those below apply. 15 percent.
1.8.1 Administrative definitions. NOTE: Seasoned timber is sometimes referred to as ‘dry’ or ‘air-
dried’ timber. It includes kiln-dried timber.
Building Authority or other Regulatory Authority — body
havi
having
ng stat
statut
utory
ory powe
powersrs to cont
contro
roll the
the desi
design
gn and
and Stress grade—class
Stress grade —classific
ificati
ation
on of timber
timber for struct
structura
urall
erection of buildings or structures, including scaffolding, purposes by means of either visual or machine grading
in the area in which the building or structure concerned to indicate the basic working stresses and stiffnesses to
is to be erected. be used for structural design purposes.
NOTE: The stress grade is designated in a form such as ‘F7’ which
Engineer —person
—person qualified
qualified for Corporate
Corporate Members
Membership
hip of indicates that, for such a grade of material, the basic working stress
The Institution of Engineers, Australia. in bending is approximately 7 MPa.
NOTE: The definition of engineer does not require that the person Unseas
Unseasone
oned timber —wood
d timber wood in whic
whichh the
the avera
verage
ge
be a Corporate Member of The Institution of Engineers. moisture content of each piece exceeds 25 percent.
1.8.2 Technical definitions. NOTE:
NOTE: Unseas
Unseasoned
oned timber
timber is someti
sometimes
mes referre
referred
d to as ‘green’
‘green’
Basic working stress—stress appropriate to an arbitrarily timber.
chosen, but constant, basic reference set of conditions. It
is deri
derive
ved
d from
from the
the know
known n stre
streng
ngth
th prop
proper
erti
ties
es of a 1.9 NOTATION. Except where specifically defined in
timber, due allowance having been made for such factors a particular clause, the quantity symbols and factors used
as material
material variability,
variability, long-duration
long-duration loading, grade of in this Standard are listed in Appendix I.
timber, and a safety factor.
1.10
1.10 UNITS
UNITS.. Unle
Unless
ss othe
otherw
rwis
isee stat
stated
ed,, the
the unit
unitss of
Basic working load for connectors—load appropriate
appropriate to measur
measureme
ement
nt used
used in this
this Standa
Standardrd are in accord
accordanc
ancee
an arbitrarily chosen, but constant, basic reference set of with the International System of Units (SI).
cond
condit
itio
ions
ns.. It is deriv
derived
ed from
from the
the know
known n stre
streng
ngth
th
NOTE
NOTE:: In gene
genera
rall N (new
(newto
ton)
n),, mm (mil
(milli
lime
metr
tre)
e) and
and MPa
MPa
properties of the timber-connector system, due allowance
(megapascal) are appropriate units to be used.
having been made for such factors as material variability,
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 8
SECTION
SECTION 2. BASIC
BASIC PROPERTIES
PROPERTIES OF STRUCTURA
STRUCTURAL
L TIMBER
TIMBER
2.1 GENERA
GENERAL. L. Permis
Permissib
sible
le stress
stresses
es for struct
structura
urall vario
various
us F-gra
F-grade
dess give
given
n in Tabl
Tablee 2.3
2.3 for
for softw
softwoo
ood
d
timb
timber
er shal
shalll be obta
obtain
ined
ed thro
throug
ughh modi
modify
fyin
ingg basi
basicc timbers, shall be multiplied by the factor 0.85.
workin
working g values
values by factors
factors approp
appropria
riate
te to the servic
servicee 2.4 DESIGN.
conditions. This general procedure applies to all types of 2.4.1 Permissib
Permissible le stresses.
stresses. Permis
Permissib
sible
le stress
stresses
es for
struct
structura
urall timber
timber,, includ
including
ing sawn
sawn timber
timber,, lamina
laminated
ted struc
tructu
tura
rall timb
timber
er,, whet
whethe
herr sawn
awn or lami lamina
nate
ted
d
timber, natural round timber and plywood. cons
constr
truc
uctio
tion,
n, or in pole
pole form,
form, shal
shalll be obta
obtainined
ed by
2.2 STRUCTURAL CLASSIFICATIONS. Tables 2.1 mult
multip
iply
lyin
ing
g the
the basi
basicc work
workin
ing
g stre
stress
sses
es give
givenn in
and 2.2 list
list the struct
structura
urall classi
classific
ficati
ations
ons and design
design Clause 2.3 by modification factors such as those given in
densities
densities (for computing
computing dead loads)
loads) of timber
timber species
species Clause 2.5 as are appropriate to the service conditions.
and species groups that are commonly used in Australia. For example,
example, F b the permis
permissibsible
le stress
stress in bendin
bending g is
The
The data
data give
givenn in Tabl
Tables
es 2.1 and
and 2.2
2.2 are
are take
takenn from
from given by —
othe
otherr Stan
Standadard
rds,
s, in part
partic
icul
ular
ar AS 20822082,, AS 22092209,, F b = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2.2
(2.2))
AS 2269, AS 2858 and AS 2878; any changes to these
Standa
Standards
rds shall be taken
taken to supers
supersede
ede the data
data cited
cited where
herein. In addition, any stress grades evaluated through k = the produ
product
ct of the rele
relevan
vantt modific
modificati
ations
ons
in-grade testing of full size structural material shall be factors, such as those in Clause 2.5, as are
taken to supersede all the above information. appr
approp
opri
riat
atee to the
the part
partic
icul
ular
ar serv
servic
icee
conditions
conditions for which the structural
structural member
NOTES:
1. The density
density of unseas
unseasoneonedd timber
timber depends
depends on its moistur
moisturee is being designed.
content which reduces as the timber dries. The values given in NOTES:
Tables 2.1 and 2.2 have been computed on the basis that the 1. As an example factor k for the design bending stress of a
example,, the factor
percen
percentage
tage saturat
saturation
ion of the timber
timber is 45 and 80 percent
percent for solid timber beam is typically given by k = k 1k 2k 8k 11k 12.
softwoods
softwoods and hardwoods
hardwoods respectively.
respectively. 2. For conveni
convenience
ence,, the modifi
modificat
cation
ion factor
factorss are collat
collated ed and
2. The
The valu
values
es of densit
densityy give
given
n in Tables
Tables 2.1 andand 2.2
2.2 do not referenced in Appendix I.
repres
represent
ent average
average values
values for the species
species indica
indicated
ted;; they
they are 2.4.2 Deflections. Deflection calculations shall take into
intend
intended
ed for use in computi
computing ng the dead loading
loading imposed
imposed by account the modification factors in Clause 2.5.1.2.
timber.
3. The
The modul
modulii of elas
elasti
tici
city
ty give
givenn in Table
Table 2.3 are
are inte
intende
ndedd to 2.5 MODIFICATION FACTORS.
repres
represent
ent averag
averagee values
values except
except where
where specie
speciess mixture
mixturess or 2.5.1 Duration of load.
species
species with high variability
variability are concerned;
concerned; in the latter case, the
cited moduli of elasticity are less than the average values.
2.5.1.1 Effect on strength. In order to derive permissible
4. A more extensive
extensive list of timber species and species
species groups will desi
design
gn stre
stress
sses
es,, the
the basi
basicc work
workin
ing
g stre
stress
ss shal
shalll be
be given in AS 1720.2. multiplied by the appropriate duration of load factor k 1
2.3 BASIC
BASIC WORK
WORKING ING STRES
STRESSE SESS AND MODUL
MODULUS US from
from Tabl
Tablee 2.5.
2.5. This
This fact
factor
or is show
shownn grap
graphi
hica
call
llyy in
OF ELASTICITY. Figure 2.1.
2.3.1
2.3.1 Basic
Basic workin
working g stress
stresses
es parall
parallel
el to grain,
grain, and In checking the strength of a structural element, all load
shear stresses in beams. These basic working
working stresses
stresses combinations must be considered.
are given in Table 2.3 for the various stress grades. For any given combination of loads of differing duration,
2.3.2 Basic working stre tress in compression ion the factor k 1 to be used is that appropriate to the load
perpendicular to the grain and shear stress at joint whic
whichh is of the
the shor
shorte
test
st dura
durati
tion
on.. In Tabl
Tablee 2.5,
2.5, the
the
details. Thes
Thesee basi
basicc work
workin
ingg stre
stress
sses
es are
are give
given
n in effective duration of a peak load refers to the cumulative
Table 2.4 for each strength group and are applicable to duration for which the peak load occurs.
all stress grades within the strength group. For the purposes
purposes of interp
interpret
retati
ation
on in the select
selection
ion of
2.3.3 Basic working stress in compression at an angle load-duration factors in this Standard, the following shall
to the grain. The basic working stress in compression at apply:
angl
angles
es to the
the grai
grain
n othe than 0° and
otherr than and 90° shall
shall be
(a) Dead
Dead loads,
loads, and live loads
loads which are removed
removed or
denoted by and sha
shall be ca
calculated fro
from the the replaced at regular intervals such that the structure
Hankinson formula remains fully loaded for a substantial proportion of
. . . (2.1) its life, are to be considered ‘permanent loads’.
(b) Live loads (such
(such as those due to vehicles
vehicles or people)
where that act on floors, and are applied at frequent but
= the angl
anglee betwee
between
n the dire
directi
ction
on of the load
load irregular intervals such that the structure is unloaded,
and the direction of the grain. or loaded well below the allowable maximum, for
2.3.4 Modulus of elasticity and rigidity. Design values most of each day, are to be considered ‘loads of five
of the modulu
moduluss of elasti
elasticit
city
y and rigidity
rigidity are given in months duration’.
Table 2.3. (c) Live loads,
loads, such as those
those arising during
during erection
erection and
NOTE:
NOTE: It should
should be noted
noted that
that the modulus
modulus of elasti
elasticit
city,
y, for the main
mainte tena
nanc
nce,
e, and
and at infr
infreq
eque
uent
nt crow
crowdd load
loadin
ing,
g,
various
various stress
stress grades
grades given
given in Table
Table 2.3,
2.3, refers
refers to the average
average applied for periods of a few days and at infrequent
modulus of elasticity for the stress-graded timbers that are grouped interv
intervals
als,, are to be consid
considere
eredd ‘loads
‘loads of five
five days
days
together
together within a stress
stress grade. Therefore,
Therefore, when a better
better estimate for
deflection is required, the modulus of elasticity values derived solely duration’.
from
from Tabl
Tablee 2.3.
2.3. for
for a give
given
n stre
stress
ss grad
gradee shou
shouldld eith
either
er be (d)
(d) Gust
Gust wind
wind load
loadss with
with a long
long retu
return
rn perio
period,d, such
such
conservativel
conservatively y modified
modified or accurate
accurate values should be obtained
obtained from asthose referred to in AS 1170.2, and impact loads
in-grade verification.
such
such as those
those caused
caused by fallin
falling
g weight
weightss or snatch
snatch
2.3.5
2.3.5 Basic
Basic workin
workingg stress
stresses
es in ten
tensio
sion
n (softw
(softwood
oodss lift
lifts,
s, are
are to be consconsid
ider
ered
ed ‘loa
‘loads
ds of five
five seco
second
nd
only). The basic
basic workin
working
g stress
stresses
es in tensio
tension,
n, for the duration’.
COPYRIGHT
9 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 2.1
STRENGTH CLASSIFICATIONS AND DESIGN DENSITY FOR SOME COMMON GROUPS OF TIMBER
Stress grade
Design
Moisture Strength Structural timber(3) Structural Pole timber(5) density (6)
Species group Joint group(2)
condition group(1) plywood(4)
Structural Structural Structural Structural Structural
kg/m3
No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5
Mixed Australian
Australian hardwoods Unseasoned S4 J3 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F11 1050
(excluding rainforest species)
from S.A. and southern N.S.W. Seasoned SD4 JD3 F22 F17 F14 F11 — F17 — 650
Ash-type Eucalypts from NSW Unseasoned S4 J3 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1050
Highlands—
Highlands— Victoria
Victoria and
Tasmania Seasoned SD4 JD3 F22 F17 F14 F11 — F17 — 650
Non-ash-type
Non-ash-type Eucalypts
Eucalypts from Qld Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1150
and N.S.W Seasoned SD3 JD2 F27 F22 F17 F14 — F22 — 750
Rainforest species Unseasoned S7 J4 F7 F5 F4 — — — F8 800
Seasoned SD7 JD4 F11 F8 F7 F5 — F8 — 500
Mixed pinus species (Australian Unseasoned — — — — — — — — — 850
grown) Seasoned SD7 JD4 F11 F8 F7 F5 — F8 — 550
Mixed softwood species (excl. Unseasoned — — — — — — — — — 850
pinus species) Seasoned SD8 JD4 F8 F7 F5 — — F7 — 500
Imported
Imported softwoods
softwoods Unseasoned S7 J6 F7 F5 F4 — — — — 850
(unidentified) Seasoned SD8 JD6 F8 F7 F5 F4 — F7 — 400
NOTES:
1. For classification into strength groups—see AS 2878.
2. For joint strength—see AS 1649.
3. For mechanical stress grades—see AS 1748.
4. For structural plywood—see AS 2269.
5. For timber poles—see AS 2209.
6. For use only in computing dead load due to mass in timber.
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 10
TABLE 2.2
STRENGTH CLASSIFICATIONS AND DESIGN DENSITY FOR SOME COMMON SPECIES OF TIMBER
Stress grade
Design
Moisture Strength (2) Structural timber(3) density(6)
Species Joint group Structural
condition group(1) Pole timber (5)
Structural Structural Structural Structural Structural plywood(4) kg/m 3
ash, alpine Unseasoned S4
S4 J3 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1 050
ash, mountain Unseasoned S4 J3 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1 050
ash, silvertop Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 100
balau Unseasoned S2 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 150
blackbutt Unseasoned S2
S2 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 150
box, brush Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 150
box, grey, coast Unseasoned S1 J1 F27 F22 F17 F14 — — F34 1 200
Seasoned SD1 JD1 F34 F34 F27 F22 — F34 — 1 100
brown barrel Unseasoned S4 J3 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1 100
chengal Unseasoned S1 J2 F27 F22 F17 F14 — — F34 1 150
fir, Douglas, North America Un
Unseasoned S5 J4 F11 F8 F7 F5 F4 — F14 710
Seasoned SD5 JD4 F14 F11 F8 F7 F5 F14 — 550
fir, Douglas, elsewhere Unseasoned S6 J5 F8 F7 F5 F4 — — F11 710
gum, blue, southern Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 150
gum, blue, Sydney Unseasoned S3 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 100
gum, red, river Unseasoned S5 J2 F11 F8 F7 F5 — — F14 1 150
gum, rose Unseasoned S3
S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 100
(continued)
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 10
TABLE 2.2
STRENGTH CLASSIFICATIONS AND DESIGN DENSITY FOR SOME COMMON SPECIES OF TIMBER
Stress grade
Design
condition group(1) Pole timber(5)
ash, alpine Unseasoned S4
S4 J3 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1 050
ash, mountain Unseasoned S4 J3 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1 050
ash, silvertop Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 100
balau Unseasoned S2 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 150
blackbutt Unseasoned S2
S2 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 150
box, brush Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 150
box, grey, coast Unseasoned S1 J1 F27 F22 F17 F14 — — F34 1 200
brown barrel Unseasoned S4 J3 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1 100
chengal Unseasoned S1 J2 F27 F22 F17 F14 — — F34 1 150
fir, Douglas, North America Un
Unseasoned S5 J4 F11 F8 F7 F5 F4 — F14 710
fir, Douglas, elsewhere Unseasoned S6 J5 F8 F7 F5 F4 — — F11 710
gum, blue, southern Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 150
gum, blue, Sydney Unseasoned S3 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 100
gum, red, river Unseasoned S5 J2 F11 F8 F7 F5 — — F14 1 150
gum, rose Unseasoned S3
S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 100
(continued)
COPYRIGHT
11 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 2.2 (continued )

Stress grade Design
Structural Structural Structural Structural Structural plywood(4) kg/m3
gum, spotted Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 200
hardwood, Johnstone River Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 150
Hemlock, western Unseasoned S6
S6 J4 F8 F7 F5 F4 — — F11 750
Hem-fir(7) Unseasoned S7 J5 F7 F5 F4 — — — F8 750
ironbark, grey Unseasoned S1 J1 F27 F22 F17 F14 — — F34 1 250
Seasoned SD1 JD1 — F34 F27 F22 — F34 — 1 100
ironbark, red, narrow-leaved Un
U nseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 250
jarrah Unseasoned S4 J2 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1 100
kapur Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 100
karri Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 150
kempas Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 100
kwila (Merbau) Unseasoned S2 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 150
lumbayu, Chengkulang Unseasoned S5 J3 F11 F8 F7 F5 — — F14 1 100
mahogany, red Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 200
marri Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 100
meranti, dark red(7) Unseasoned S5
S5 J4 F11 F8 F7 F5 — — F14 1 100
Seasoned SD6 JD4 F14 F11 F8 F7 — F11 — 600-750
(continued)
COPYRIGHT
11 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 2.2 (continued )

Stress grade Design
Moisture Strength Structural timber(3) density(6)
Species Joint group (2) Structural
Structural Structural Structural Structural Structural plywood(4) kg/m3
gum, spotted Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 200
hardwood, Johnstone River Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 150
Hemlock, western Unseasoned S6
S6 J4 F8 F7 F5 F4 — — F11 750
Hem-fir(7) Unseasoned S7 J5 F7 F5 F4 — — — F8 750
ironbark, grey Unseasoned S1 J1 F27 F22 F17 F14 — — F34 1 250
Seasoned SD1 JD1 — F34 F27 F22 — F34 — 1 100
ironbark, red, narrow-leaved Un
U nseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 250
jarrah Unseasoned S4 J2 F14 F11 F8 F7 — — F17 1 100
kapur Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 100
karri Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 150
kempas Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 100
kwila (Merbau) Unseasoned S2 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 150
lumbayu, Chengkulang Unseasoned S5 J3 F11 F8 F7 F5 — — F14 1 100
mahogany, red Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1 200
marri Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1 100
meranti, dark red(7) Unseasoned S5
S5 J4 F11 F8 F7 F5 — — F14 1 100
Seasoned SD6 JD4 F14 F11 F8 F7 — F11 — 600-750
(continued)
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 12
TABLE 2.2 (continued)

Stress grade
(2)
Joint group Design
(3)
Moisture Strength Structural timber density(6)
Species
condition group(1) Structural Pole timber(5)

mersawa Unseasoned S6 J3 F8 F7 F5 F4 — — F11 1050
messmate Unseasoned S3 J3 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1100
oak, tulip brown Unseasoned S2 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1150
pine, cypress, white Unseasoned S5 J3 — — F7 F5 F4 — F14 850
Seasoned SD6 JD3 — — — — — F11 — 700
pine, hoop Unseasoned S6 J4 F8 F7 F5 F4 — — F11 800
pine, radiata (Australia
(Australia and Unseasoned S6 J4 — — — — — — F11 800
New Zealand)
Zealand)
pine, slash Unseasoned S5 J3 F11 F8 F7 F5 F4 — F14 850
spruce-pine-fir(7) Unseasoned — — — — — — — — — 700
stringybark brown Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1100
stringybark yellow Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1150
tallowwood Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1200
turpentine Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1050
wandoo Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1250
NOTES:
7. Species mixture.
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 12
TABLE 2.2 (continued)

Stress grade
Joint group(2) Design
Moisture Strength Structural timber(3) density(6)
Species
condition group(1) Structural (5)
Pole timber
mersawa Unseasoned S6 J3 F8 F7 F5 F4 — — F11 1050
messmate Unseasoned S3 J3 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1100
oak, tulip brown Unseasoned S2 J2 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1150
pine, cypress, white Unseasoned S5 J3 — — F7 F5 F4 — F14 850
Seasoned SD6 JD3 — — — — — F11 — 700
pine, hoop Unseasoned S6 J4 F8 F7 F5 F4 — — F11 800
pine, radiata (Australia
(Australia and Unseasoned S6 J4 — — — — — — F11 800
New Zealand)
Zealand)
pine, slash Unseasoned S5 J3 F11 F8 F7 F5 F4 — F14 850
spruce-pine-fir(7) Unseasoned — — — — — — — — — 700
stringybark brown Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1100
stringybark yellow Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1150
tallowwood Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1200
turpentine Unseasoned S3 J2 F17 F14 F11 F8 — — F22 1050
wandoo Unseasoned S2 J1 F22 F17 F14 F11 — — F27 1250
NOTES:
7. Species mixture.
COPYRIGHT
13 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 2.3
BASIC WORKING STRESSES AND STIFFNESS FOR STRUCTURAL TIMBER
Basic working stress, MPa
Short duration
Tension parallel to Compression modulus of Short duration
Stress grade Bending Shear in beams
grain parallel
parallel to grain elasticity* modulus of rigidity
( E ) (G)
F34 34.5 20.7 2.45 26.0 21 500 1 430
F27 27.5 16.5 2.05 20.5 18 500 1 230
F22 22.0 13.2 1.70 16.5 16 000 1 070
F17 17.0 10.2 1.45 13.0 14 000 930
F14 14.0 8.4 1.25 10.2 12 000 800
F11 11.0 6.6 1.05 8.4 10 500 700
F8 8.6 5.2 0.85 6.6 9 100 610
F7 6.9 4.1 0.70 5.2 7 900 530
F5 5.5 3.3 0.60 4.1 6 900 460
F4 4.3 2.6 0.50 3.3 6 100 410
F3 3.4 2.0 0.45 2.6 5 200 350
F2 2.7 1.6 0.35 2.1 4 500 300
* The modulus of elasticity includes an allowance of about 5 percent for shear deformation.
NOTE: For the basic working stresses in tension for softwoods only,
only, refer to Clause 2.3.5.
TABLE 2.4
BASIC WORKING STRESSES FOR COMPRESSION
PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN AND SHEAR AT JOINTS
Strength
Compression
Shear at joints details
perpendicular to grain
Unseasoned Seasoned
— SD1 10.4 4.15

SD2 9.0 3.45
13 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 2.3
BASIC WORKING STRESSES AND STIFFNESS FOR STRUCTURAL TIMBER
Short duration
Tension parallel to Compression modulus of Short duration
Stress grade Bending Shear in beams
grain parallel
parallel to grain elasticity* modulus of rigidity
( E ) (G)
F34 34.5 20.7 2.45 26.0 21 500 1 430
F27 27.5 16.5 2.05 20.5 18 500 1 230
F22 22.0 13.2 1.70 16.5 16 000 1 070
F17 17.0 10.2 1.45 13.0 14 000 930
F14 14.0 8.4 1.25 10.2 12 000 800
F11 11.0 6.6 1.05 8.4 10 500 700
F8 8.6 5.2 0.85 6.6 9 100 610
F7 6.9 4.1 0.70 5.2 7 900 530
F5 5.5 3.3 0.60 4.1 6 900 460
F4 4.3 2.6 0.50 3.3 6 100 410
F3 3.4 2.0 0.45 2.6 5 200 350
F2 2.7 1.6 0.35 2.1 4 500 300
* The modulus of elasticity includes an allowance of about 5 percent for shear deformation.
NOTE: For the basic working stresses in tension for softwoods only,
only, refer to Clause 2.3.5.
TABLE 2.4
BASIC WORKING STRESSES FOR COMPRESSION
PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN AND SHEAR AT JOINTS
Strength
Compression
Shear at joints details
Unseasoned Seasoned
— SD1 10.4 4.15

— SD2 9.0 3.45
— SD3 7.8 2.95
S1 SD4 6.6 2.45

S2 SD5 5.2 2.05
S3 SD6 4.1 1.70
S4 SD7 3.3 1.45

S5 SD8 2.6 1.25
S6 — 2.1 1.05
S7 — 1.7 0.85
TABLE 2.5
DURATION OF LOAD FACTOR FOR STRENGTH
Multiplying factor ( k1)

Effective duration of Basic working loads for
Type of load Basic
Basic stresses
stresses for solid
peak load laterally loaded
timber
connectors*
Instantaneous 5 seconds 1.75 2.00
Standard test 5 minutes 1.75 1.75
Short term 5 hours 1.70 1.50
Medium term 5 days 1.65 1.35

Long term 5 months 1.40 1.20
Permanent 50+ years 1.00 1.00
* For connectors loaded in withdrawal and for the strength of steel in connectors, k 1 = 1.00.
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 14
2.5.1.2 Effect on stiffness. For members in bending and The modification factors j2 and j3 given in Table 2.6 are
compression or for members in tension, the calculated not applicable to collapse
collapse susceptibl
susceptiblee hardwoods
hardwoods (see
shor
short-t
t-ter
erm
m defo
deforma
rmatition
on shal
shalll be mult
multip
ipli
lied
ed by the
the Clause 1.8.2) when their initial moisture content is above
appropriate creep factor j 2 or j3, as given in Table 2.6 25%.
25%. For
For thes
thesee timb
timber
erss the
the cree
creep
p fact
factor
orss may
may be
and illustrated graphically in Figures 2.2 and 2.3. considerably greater than the values shown.
Values
Values intermediate
intermediate between
between those given in Table 2.6 NOTES:
may be obtained through an interpolation involving the 1. The loads
loads to be considered in
in computing deflectio
deflections
ns are not only
the peak loads
loads used
used for strength
strength checks,
checks, but all loads
loads that act
loga
logari
rith
thm
m of time
time,, and
and a line
linear
ar func
functi
tion
on of init
initia
iall during the life of the structure. In general, peak values of live
moisture content as shown in Figures 2.2 and 2.3. load
load are not of a permane
permanent
nt nature
nature;; accordi
accordingly
ngly if a designe
designerr
wishes to compute the long term deformations of a structure he
When several types of load act on a timber member, the must first estimate the portion of the load that is permanently or
maximum deformation shall be taken to be equal to the semi-permane
semi-permanently
ntly applied, and then use an appropriate
appropriate creep
sum of the deformations computed for each type of load factor.
acting alone. 2. Where there
there is a recovery
recovery period of more than tenten times that of
the applied load, the creep component of deformation may be
assumed to be totally recovered.
TABLE 2.6
DURATION OF LOAD FACTOR FOR DEFLECTION
For bending, compression and For tension members

Initial moisture shear members j
( j2) ( j3)
j
content*
Load duration Load duration Load duration Load duration
% ≤ 1 day ≥ 1 year ≤ 1 day ≥ 1 year
≤ 15 1 2 1 1
≥ 25 1 3 1 1.5
* Moisture content at the time of load application.
FIGURE
FIGURE 2.1. DURATION
DURATION OF LOAD FACTOR
FACTOR k 1
COPYRIGHT
15 AS 1720.1—1988
2.5.2 Moisture
Moisture condition.
condition. Depend
Depending
ing on the initia
initiall TABLE 2.7
moisture content of the timber and the moisture content PARTIAL SEASONING FACTOR
at time
time of load
loadin
ing
g and
and thro
throug
ugho
hout
ut its
its life
life,, the
the basi
basicc
working stresses shall be modified as follows: Least dimension of 38 mm or 100 mm
50 mm 75 mm
member less or more
(a) Unseasoned
Unseasoned timber . Where
Where unseas
unseasone
onedd timber
timber is Value of k4 1 .15 1 .10 1 .0 5 1 .0 0
used,
used, the basic
basic workin
workingg stress
stresses
es shall
shall be those in
Tables 2.3 and 2.4 appropriate to the stress grade (c) Seasoned timber.
and
and stre
streng
ngth
th group
group of the
the unse
unseas
ason
oned
ed timbe
timberr as
indicated in Tables 2.1 and 2.2. (i)
(i) Wher
Wheree seas
season
oned
ed timbe
timberr is used
used,, the
the basi
basicc
(b) Unseas
Unseasoneonedd timber
timber partly before use. Wher
partly dry before Wheree working stresses shall be those in Tables 2.3
unseasoned timber is used under normal conditions and 2.4 approp
appropria
riate
te to the stress
stress grade
grade and
of temperature and humidity and will not be subject strength group of the timber in the seasoned
to its full design load until it has partly seasoned, i.e. condition as indicated in Tables 2.1 and 2.2.
to below 25% moisture content, the basic working (ii)
(ii) Where
here seas
easone
oned timb
timber
er is subj
subjeected
cted to
stresses for unseasoned timber may be increased by cond
condit
itio
ions
ns in whic
which h its
its aver
averag
agee mois
moistu
ture
re
multiplying by the factor k 4 given in Table 2.7. content for a 12-month period is expected to
exceed 15%, the basic working stresses shall
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 16
be decr
decrea
ease
sed
d by mult
multip
iply
lyin
ing
g by the
the fact
factor
or k 5 TABLE 2.9
determined as the greater of: PARALLEL SUPPORT FACTOR
Effective number of elements carrying
Factor k 8
k5 = (2.3(a)) common load ( neff )
1 1.00
2 1.14
and 3 1.20
4 1.24
k5 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2.3
(2.3(b
(b))
)) 5 1.26
6 1.28
where 7 1.30
EMC = the
the high
highesestt valu
valuee of the
the annu
annualal 8 1.31
average moisture content (percent) 9 1.32
tha
that the
the timb
timbeer will
will atta
attain
in in 1 0 o r mo re 1 .3 3
service. Except
Except for lamina
laminated
ted timber
timber member
members,s, the effect
effective
ive
F ′ (seasoned) = the
the basi
basicc work
workin ingg stre
stress
ss for the
the number of elements ( neff ) may be taken to be the total
seasoned material number of members acting together.
F ′ (unseasoned) = the
the basic worki rking stress for For laminated timber members, the effective number of
material of the same grade in the elemen
elements
ts (neff ) to be used
used in Tab
Table
le 2.9
2.9 shall
shall be tak
taken
en
unseasoned condition. as—
2.5.3 Temperature. For covered timber structures under
ambient conditions, no modification to the basic working neff = nm × nL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2.4
(2.4))
stre
stress
sses
es needneed be mademade for the the effe
effect
ct of temp
tempererat
ature
ure where
except that where seasoned timber is used in structures nm = tota
totall num
numbe
berr of
of memb
member
erss
erecte
erected d in the coastacoastall region
regionss of Queens
Queenslanland
d north
north of nL = effect
effective
ive number
number of lamina
laminatio
tion
n element
elementss
latitude 25°S and all other regions of Australia north of per member as defined in Clause 7.3.2.
latitu de 16°S, the
latitude the basi
basicc work
workin ing
g stre
stress
sses
es shal
shalll be Where
Where the factor
factor k 8 is applie
applied d to lamina
laminated
ted member
memberss
multiplied by a factor k 6 of 0.9. acting in parallel, the factor k 23 discussed in Clause 7.3.2
NOTE:
NOTE: Informa
Informatio
tion
n on the effects
effects of high temperatu
temperatures
res can be shall be taken to be equal to unity.
obtained
obtained from:
MEYER, KELLOG,, R.M. Struct
MEYER, R.W. and KELLOG Structura
urall Use of Wood
Wood in 2.5.5.3 Grid systems. Where constructions are such that
Environments. Van Nostrand, 1982
Adverse Environments. three or more members act together to support either an
2.5.4 Length and position of bearing. For rectangular overlying set of members usually laid at right angles to
bearing areas for bearings of length less than 150 mm the
the supp
suppororti
ting
ng memb
member erss or a stru struct
ctur
ural
al shea
sheath
thin
ingg
and with the bearing surface 75 mm or more from the material, a load sharing factor k 9 may be applied to the
end of a piece
piece of timber
timber,, the basic working
working stress
stress in basic working stress for bending, in beams. This factor
bearin
bearingg perpen
perpendic
dicula
ularr to the grain
grain given
given in Table
Table 2.4 is given by the equation:
may
may be multi
multipl
plie
ied
d by thethe appr
approp
opri
riat
atee fact
factor
or k 7 in k 9 = k 0 + (k 8 - k 0) [1.0 - 2(s / L)] . . . . . . . . . (2.5)
Table 2.8, the length of bearing being measured parallel but not less than k 0, where
to the grain of the loaded member. s = the centre-to-centre spacing of the
For circular bearing areas the effective
effective bearing length supporting members
shal
shalll be take
taken
n as being
being equa
equall to the
the diam
diamet
eter
er of the
the L = spanspan ofof the
the supp
support
orting
ing member
member
bearing area. k 8 = loadload sharing
sharing factofactorr for paralle
parallell structu
structural
ral
systems
systems (see Clause
Clause 2.5.5.2)
2.5.5.2)
TABLE 2.8
k 0 = 1.0 1.0 for
for soli
solid
d tim
timbe
berr
LENGTH OF BEARING FACTOR
= k 23 f o r g l ue ue d-
d- l am
am i na
na te
te d t i mb
mb er
er
Length of bearing 150 or (Clause 7.3.2).
12 25 50 75 12 5
of member more
Value of k 7 1 .8 5 1.60 1 .3 0 1 .1 5 1.05 1 .0 0
The load sharing
sharing factor
factor k 9 is illustrated
illustrated graphically
graphically in
Figure 2.4.
NOTE: In addition
addition to load sharing
sharing characterist
characteristics,
ics, grid systems
systems also
2.5.5 Load sharing. provide a method for laterally
laterally distributing
distributing concentrated
concentrated loads as
described in Paragraph C8, Appendix C.
2.5.5.1 General. When
When a struct
structura
urall system
system consis
consists
ts of
parallel acting elements that interact to assist each other, 2.5.6 Size factor for flexural
flexural and tension
tension members.
members.
then the basic working stresses may be increased by the The basic working stress in bending
bending and tension
tension shall be
appropriate
appropriate load sharing
sharing factor.
factor. multiplied by the size factor k 11 as given in Table 2.10.
Linear interpolation may be used for intermediate sizes.
2.5.5.2 Parallel structural systems. For structural
structural systems
systems
comprised of two or more elements effectively connected For beams of depth d greater than 1500 mm, the value
so that all of the elements are constrained to the same of k 11 shall
shall be taken
taken to be given
given by —
deformation, the load sharing factor k 8 may be obtained k 11 = (300 d) 0.167
(300/
/ d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2.6
(2.6))
from Table 2.9, and applied to the basic working stresses NOTE: The size factor for beams refers to beams of solid timber or
for bending and compression
compression.. If the effective
effective number of glulam. For built up beams the size factor shall be applied to the
elements is not an exact integer, then a suitable value of individ
individual
ual compone
components
nts;; an exampl
examplee of this
this would
would be the tension
tension
flange of a box beam.
k8 may be derived by linear interpolation.
COPYRIGHT
17 AS 1720.1—1988
2.5.7 Stability factor. In the design of slender structural The factor k l2 depends on both material factors and the
members, a factor k 12 is used to allow for the effects of slendernes
slendernesss coefficient
coefficient S . These factors and the
slendernes
slendernesss on strength.
strength. It is defined
defined by — slende
slenderne
rness
ss coeffi
coefficie
cient
nt are define
defined
d for each
each type
type of
F = k 12F 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2.7
(2.7)) slender structural member in the section of this Standard
where appropriate to that element.
F = t h e n o mi n a l d e s i g n s t r e s s 2.5.8 Material and application factor. For all timber
F 0 = the va
value of
of F if the struct
structura
urall member
member members, the basic working stresses given in Tables 2.3
were completely stable. and 2.4
2.4 shall
hall be mult
multip
ipli
lied
ed by the
the mate
materi
rial
al and
and
application fact K 2, shown in table 2.11
TABLE
TABLE 2.10
SIZE FACTORS FOR BEAMS AND TENSION MEMBERS
Maximum depth of beam or twice
width of tension
tension member 300 375 500 625 750 1 000 1 250 1 500
mm
Value of k11 1 0. 9 6 0.92 0.89 0 .8 6 0.82 0.79 0 .7 7
RELATIVE SPACING ( s/L)
FIGURE
FIGURE 2.4. LOAD SHARI
SHARING
NG FACTOR k 9 FOR GRID SYSTEMS
TABLE
TABLE 2.11
MATERIAL AND APPLICATION FACTOR
Material and application factor ( k2)
Consequence of failure
Basis for assignment of structural properties
classification*
From
From in-g
in-grad
radee verifi
verificat
cation
ion All other
other method
methodss
Normal 1.0 1 .0
High 0.9 0 .7
* Normal consequence
consequence of failure can
can be interpreted
interpreted as that associated
associated with housing
construction,
construction, secondary framing in commercial or industrial
industrial scale structures
structures and
prima
primary
ry eleme
elements
nts in farm
farm buil
buildi
dings
ngs.. High
High cons
conseq
eque
uence
nce of failur
failuree can
can be
interpreted
interpreted as that associated
associated with primary structural
structural elements
elements in commercial
commercial or
industrial
industrial scale structures,
structures, bridges and similar.
similar.
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 18
SECTION
SECTION 3. DESIGN
DESIGN OF BASIC STRUCTUR
STRUCTURAL
AL MEMBERS
3.1 GENERA
GENERAL. L. This
This Sect
Sectio
ion
n shal
shalll be appl
applie
ied
d in 3.2 BEAM DESIGN.
conjunction with the clauses of Section 2. This Section 3.2.1 Maximum
Maximum stresses.
stresses. Calcul
Calculate
ated
d values
values for the
applies to the design of basic structural members such as stre
stress
sses
es in a beam
beam shalshalll not
not exce
exceed
ed the
the permi
permiss
ssib
ible
le
colu
column
mns,s, beam
beamss and
and ties.
ties. In part
partic
icul
ular
ar many
many of thethe stresses in bending F b, in shear F s, and in compression
design parameters given refer to members of rectangular perpendicular to the grain F p, determined in accordance
cross-section, for which the notation used is shown in with Clause 2.4 for sawn and laminated timber and for
Figure 3.1 . The corresponding parameters for members poles. Due regard shall be paid to the beam’s effective
of less
less usual
usual shape
shape are given
given in Append
Appendix ix C. Special
Special
span and lateral stability, and to an acceptable deflection.
design requirements related to the use of pole timbers,
(See
(See also
also Clause
Clause 3.5 and Paragraph
Paragraph C5 for combin
combineded
glued-laminated construction and plywood are given in
bending
bending and axial loading,
loading, and Paragraph
Paragraph C7, Appendix
Appendix
later sections. Clauses for the design of more complex
C for the design of lateral and torsional restraints.)
struct
structura
urall elemen
elements
ts are given
given in Append
Appendix ix C. These
These
include
include clauses related to — When calculating a shear force in a beam, loads lying
within a distance of the support of 1.5 times the depth of
(a) the design of spaced
spaced columns (Paragra
(Paragraph
ph C6);
the beam from the inside
inside face of the support
support may be
(b) buckling
buckling restraint systems
systems (Paragraph
(Paragraph C7);
disreg
disregard
arded,
ed, except
except in the design
design of notche
notched
d beams
beams
(C) grid systems (Paragraph C8);
(Paragraph C9, Appendix C).
(d) notched
notched beams (Paragraph
(Paragraph C9);
(e) notched
notched columns (Paragra
(Paragraph
ph C10); and For unnotc
unnotched
hed beams,
beams, the permis
permissib
sible
le stress
stress shall be
(f) notched
notched tension members
members (Paragraph
(Paragraph C11).
C11). calculated by the following equations:
NOTE: In beam design deflection considerations will usually govern (a) In bend
bending—
ing—
member sizes (See Clauses 1.5.3.6, 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5).
Fb = . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.1))
(b) In shear
shear--
Fs = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.2
(3.2))
(c) In compression
compression perpend
perpendicula
icularr to the grain —
Fp = . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.3
(3.3))
where the factors k 1 to k 11 are given in Section 2 and k 12
is the stability
stability factor defined in Equation
Equation 3.8 (see Clause
3.2.4). For beams in grid systems the load sharing factor
k 8 is replaced by k 9.
3.2.2 Effective span.
span. The effect
effective
ive span
span of flexur
flexural
al
member
memberss shall
shall be taken
taken as the distan
distance
ce betwee
between
n the
centres of areas of bearing.
For member
memberss that
that extend
extend over bearin
bearings
gs longer
longer than
than is
necessary, the span may be taken as the distance between
centres of imaginary bearings which are chosen in such
a way that their lengths are adequate to comply with the
FIGURE
FIGURE 3.1. NOTATION
NOTATION FOR A requirement
requirementss of this Standard.
Standard.
RECTANGULAR CROSS-SECTION
3.2.3 Slenderness coefficient for lateral buckling.
3.2.3.1 General. For the genera
generall case,
case, and for severa
severall
usef
useful
ul spec
specif
ific
ic case
cases,
s, equa
equati
tion
onss for
for eval
evalua
uati
ting
ng the
the
FIGURE
NOTATION FOR BEAM RESTRAIN
RESTRAINTS
TS
COPYRIGHT
19 AS 1720.1—1988
slen
slende
derne
rness
ss coef
coeffic
ficie
ient
nt are
are give
given
n in Para
Paragra
graph
ph C3,
C3, TABLE 3.1
Append
Appendixix C. For the special
special cases
cases of solid
solid beams
beams of MATERI
MATERIAL
AL CONST
CONSTANT
ANT FOR
FOR BEAMS
BEAMS
rectangular
rectangular cross-sect
cross-section,
ion, the simple approximati
approximations
ons
given in Clause 3.2.3.2 may be used. Material constant
Stress grade
3.2.3.2 Beams of rectangular cross-section. For beams of Seasoned
Seasoned timbe
timberr Unseason
Unseasoned
ed timber
timber
rectangular
rectangular cross-secti
cross-section,
on, the slendernes
slendernesss coefficients
coefficients
may be taken as follows: F34 1.23 1.32
F27 1.18 1.27
(a) Beams that bend only about their major axis . For F22 1.13 1.22
discrete restraint systems that effectively restrain the
F17 1.08 1.17
compression flange of the beam at points L ay apart, F14 1.04 1.14
the slendernes
slendernesss coefficient,
coefficient, denoted
denoted by S 1, may be F11 1.00 1.09
taken to be—
F8 0.95 1.05
S 1 = 1.25( L ayd / b2)1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.4
(3.4)) F7 0.91 1.01
For restraint systems that are continuous along the F5 0.88 0.97
compre
compressi ssion
on flange
flange of the beam, beam, the slende
slenderne
rness
ss F4 0.84 0.93
coefficient may be taken to be— F3 0.80 0.90
S 1 = 0.
0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.
(3.5) F2 0.78 0.87
For restraint systems that are continuous along the

tension flange of the beam, and in addition the load
is applie
applied d to the tensio
tension n flange
flange,, the slende
slenderne
rness
ss
coefficient may be taken to be—
S 1 = 2.5d / b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.6
(3.6))
(b) Beams that bend only about their minor axis. For all
cases,
cases, the slendernes
coefficient,, denoted
denoted by S 2,
may be taken to be—
S 2 = 0.
0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.
(3.7)
(c) Beams
Beams thatthat bend
bend about
about both axes. The design of
both axes
such beams described in Clause 3.2.5, is based on an
intera
interacti
ction
on of the two specia speciall cases
cases for bendin
bendingg
abou
aboutt sing
single
le axes
axes only only,, and
and henc
hencee no spec specia
iall
definition of slenderness is required for this case.
3.2.4
3.2.4 Stabil
Stability
ity factor
factor.. The stabil
stability
ity factor
factor k 12 for
modification of the basic working stress in bending shall
be given by—
(a)
(a) For
For S ≤ 10 —
k 12 = 1.0
1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.8
(3.8(a
(a))
))
(b) For 10 ≤ S ≤ 20 —
(b) For
k 12 = 1.5 - 0.05 S . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.8 (3.8(b
(b))
))
(c) For S ≥ 20 —
(c) For FIGURE
FIGURE 3.3. EFFECT
EFFECT OF SLENDERN
SLENDERNESS
ESS
k 12 = 200/( S )2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.8(3.8(c
(c))
)) COEFFICIENT ON THE STABILITY FACTOR
where a conservative value of the material constant FOR BEAMS AND COLUMNS
is given in Table 3.1; more accurate values of (c)
(c) Beam
Beam that that is bent
bent abou aboutt both
both majo
majorr and
and mino
minorr
are given by Equations C1 and C2 and tabulated in axes—
Tables C1 and C2 of Appendix C. The shape of the ( f bx / F F by) ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . (3.12)
F bx) + ( f by / F
stability factor curve is illustrated in Figure 3.3. where
For large beams, where a size factor k 11 < 1.0 is used
f bx, f by = M x / Z x, M y / Z y = calculated bending
either for solid beams or the tension flanges of built up
stre
stress sses
es abou
aboutt the
the majo
majorr and
and
beams,
beams, the
the materia
materiall consta
constantnt inserted
inserted in Equatio
Equationsns 3.8
3.8
minor axes respectively
above
above may
may be replac
replaced
ed by * where—
where—
F bx, F by = permis permissib sible
le design
design values
values of f bx,
* = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.9
(3.9)) f by if the
the beam
beam were
were bent
bent abou
aboutt
only one axis.
3.2.5 Allowable nominal bending stress. The following
are the design criteria for the allowable bending stress in For a less conservative criterion, see Equation C14 of
a beam: Appendix C.
(a)
(a) Beam
Beam that is bent
bent only
only about
about its
its majo
majorr axis
axis (the 3.2.6
3.2.6 Str
Streng
ength
th of notche
notched
d beams
beams.. Clau
Clause
sess for
for the
the
x-axis)
-axis) — desi
design
gn stre
streng
ngth
th of notch
otched
ed bea
beams are
are give
given
n in
Paragraph C9, Appendix C.
F bx ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.10)
f bx / F
(b)
(b) Beam
Beam that
that is bent
bent only
only abou
aboutt its
its mino
minorr axis
axis (the
(the 3.2.7 Concentrated
Concentrated loads and partial
partial area loads on
y-axis) grid systems. Clauses to assist in the design of floor grid
systems to resist concentrated and partial area loads are
F by ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.11)
f by / F given in Paragraph C8, Appendix C.
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 20
(a) For buckling about major axis (b) For buckling about minor axis
FIGURE
NOTATION FOR COLUMN RESTRAINTS
RESTRAINTS
COPYRIGHT
21 AS 1720.1—1988
3.3 COLUMN DESIGN. length

length of the column, the slenderness
slenderness coefficient
coefficient may be
3.3.1 Maximum
Maximum stresses.
stresses. The averag
averagee compre
compressi
ssive
ve taken to be—
stress
stress ( f c), calcul
calculate
atedd on the effecti
effective
ve cross-
cross-sec
sectio
tional
nal S 3 = 0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.15)
area A of a member
member concentr
concentrica
ically
lly loaded
loaded by an axial (b) Columns that can bend only about their minor axis .
force P, shall not exceed
exceed the maximum permissibl
permissiblee stress
stress For
For disc
discre
rete
te rest
restra
rain
intt syst
system
ems,
s, the
the slen
slendedern
rnes
esss
(F c) in compression parallel to the grain as determined in coefficient, denoted by S 4, may be taken to be the
accord
accordanc
ancee with
with Clause
Clause 2.4 for sawn
sawn and lamina
laminated
ted lesser of the following:
timb
timberer and
and for
for pole
poles.
s. (See
(See also
also Clau
Clause se 3.5.
3.5.11 for
for S 4 = Lay / b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.16(
6(a)
a)))
combined bending and compression, and Paragraph C7, and
Appe
Append ndix
ix C, forfor the
the desi
design
gn of late
latera
rall and
and tors
torsio
iona
nall S 4 = g13 L / b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.16(
6(b)
b)))
restraints.) where
For
For unno
unnotc tche
hed
d colu
column
mns,
s, the
the perm
permisissi
sibl
blee stre
stress
ss in Lay = th the distance between points of
compressio
compression n shall be given by — effe
effect
ctiv
ivel
ely
y rigi
rigidd rest
restra
rain
ints
ts agai
agains
nstt
Fc = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.13)
3) lateral
lateral movement in the direction
direction of the
x-axis as shown in Figure 3.4(b)
where the factors
factors k 1 - k 8 are given in Section 2 and k 12 is g13 = the coeffi
coefficie
cient
nt given
given in Table
Table 3.2.
3.2.
the stability factor defined
defined by Equations 3.18(a), 3.18(b)
For restraint systems that act continuously along one
and 3.18(c).
3.18(c).
edge
edge only
only and
and whic
whichh rest
restra
rain
in move
moveme mentnt in the
the
TABLE 3.2 direct
direction
ion of the x-axis,
-axis, the slendernes
coefficient
EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR g 13, may be taken to be—
FOR COLUMNS WITHOUT INTERMEDIATE S 4 = 3.5 d / b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.17)
7)
LATERAL RESTRAINT (c) Columns that can bend about both axes . The design
Effective of such columns,
columns, described
described in Clause
Clause 3.5.1, is based
Condition of end restraint length factor
( g13 )
on an inte
intera
ract
ctio
ion
n of the
the two
two spec
specia
iall case
casess for
for
bending about single axes only, and hence no special
Fl a t e n d s 0.7
Rest
Restra
rain
ined
ed at both
both ends
ends in posit
positio
ion
n and dire
direct
ctio
ion
n 0.7
Each end held by two bolts (substantially 0.75 3.3.3
3.3.3 Stabil
Stability
ity factor
factor.. The stabil
stability
ity factor
factor k 12 for
restrained) modification of the basic working stress in compression
One end fixed in position and direction,
direction, the other 0.85 shall be given by:
restrained in position only
21 AS 1720.1—1988
3.3 COLUMN DESIGN. length

length of the column, the slenderness
coefficient may be
3.3.1 Maximum
Maximum stresses.
stresses. The averag
averagee compre
compressi
ssive
ve taken to be—
stress
stress ( f c), calcul
calculate
atedd on the effecti
effective
ve cross-
cross-sec
sectio
tional
nal S 3 = 0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.15)
area A of a member
member concentr
concentrica
ically
lly loaded
loaded by an axial (b) Columns that can bend only about their minor axis .
force P, shall not exceed
exceed the maximum permissibl
permissiblee stress
stress For
For disc
discre
rete
te rest
restra
rain
intt syst
system
ems,
s, the
the slen
slendedern
rnes
esss
(F c) in compression parallel to the grain as determined in coefficient, denoted by S 4, may be taken to be the
accord
accordanc
ancee with
with Clause
Clause 2.4 for sawn
sawn and lamina
laminated
ted lesser of the following:
timb
timberer and
and for
for pole
poles.
s. (See
(See also
also Clau
Clause se 3.5.
3.5.11 for
for S 4 = Lay / b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.16(
6(a)
a)))
combined bending and compression, and Paragraph C7, and
Appe
Append ndix
ix C, forfor the
the desi
design
gn of late
latera
rall and
and tors
torsio
iona
nall S 4 = g13 L / b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.16(
6(b)
b)))
restraints.) where
For
For unno
unnotc tche
hed
d colu
column
mns,
s, the
the perm
permisissi
sibl
blee stre
stress
ss in Lay = th the distance between points of
compressio
compression n shall be given by — effe
effect
ctiv
ivel
ely
y rigi
rigidd rest
restra
rain
ints
ts agai
agains
nstt
Fc = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.13)
3) lateral
lateral movement in the direction
direction of the
x-axis as shown in Figure 3.4(b)
where the factors
factors k 1 - k 8 are given in Section 2 and k 12 is g13 = the coeffi
coefficie
cient
nt given
given in Table
Table 3.2.
3.2.
the stability factor defined
defined by Equations 3.18(a), 3.18(b)
For restraint systems that act continuously along one
and 3.18(c).
3.18(c).
edge
edge only
only and
and whic
whichh rest
restra
rain
in move
moveme mentnt in the
the
TABLE 3.2 direct
direction
ion of the x-axis,
-axis, the slendernes
coefficient
EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR g 13, may be taken to be—
FOR COLUMNS WITHOUT INTERMEDIATE S 4 = 3.5 d / b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.17)
7)
LATERAL RESTRAINT (c) Columns that can bend about both axes . The design
Effective of such columns,
columns, described
described in Clause
Clause 3.5.1, is based
Condition of end restraint length factor
( g13 )
on an inte
intera
ract
ctio
ion
n of the
the two
two spec
specia
iall case
casess for
for
bending about single axes only, and hence no special
Fl a t e n d s 0.7
Rest
Restra
rain
ined
ed at both
both ends
ends in posit
positio
ion
n and dire
direct
ctio
ion
n 0.7
Each end held by two bolts (substantially 0.75 3.3.3
3.3.3 Stabil
Stabilityity factor
factor.. The stabil
stability
ity factor
factor k 12 for
restrained) modification of the basic working stress in compression
One end fixed in position and direction,
direction, the other 0.85 shall be given by:
restrained in position only (a) For S ≤ 10 —
(a) For
R e str a in ed
ed a t b ot
oth e n ds
ds in p os
os iti o n o nl
nly 1 .0
.0
k 12 = 1.0
1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.18(
8(a)
a)))
Restrained
Restrained at one end in position
position and direction
direction 1.5
and at the other end partially
partially restrained
restrained in (b) For 10 ≤ S ≤ 20 —
(b) For
direction
direction but not in position
position k 12 = 1.5 - 0.05 S . . . . . . . . . . (3.1 (3.18(
8(b)
b)))
Restrained
Restrained at one end in position
position and direction
direction 2.0 (c) For S ≥ 20 —
(c) For
but not restrained
restrained in either position
position or direction
direction
at the other end k 12 = 200/( S )2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1(3.18(
8(c)
c)))
where
where a conser
conservatvative
ive valu
valuee of the
the materia
materiall consta
constant
nt is
3.3.2 Slenderness coefficients for lateral buckling. given
given in Table
Table 3.3;
3.3; more
more accur
accurate
ate values
values of of are given
given
3.3.2.1 General. For the genera generall case,
case, and for several
several by Equations C3 and C4 and tabulated in Tables C3 and
usef
useful
ul spec
specifi
ificc case
cases, s, equa
equatition
onss for
for eval
evalua
uati
ting
ng the
the C4, Appendix C. The shape of the stability factor curve
slen
slende
derne
rness
ss coef
coeffic
ficie
ient
nt are
are give
givenn in Para Paragra
graphph C4,
C4, is illustrated in Figure 3.3.
Appendix C. For the case of solid columns of rectangular TABLE 3.3
cros
cross-
s-se
sect
ctio
ionn as showshown n in FiguFigure
re 3.1,
3.1, the
the simp
simplele MATERI
MATERIAL
AL CONST
CONSTANT
ANT FORFOR COLUM
COLUMNS
NS
approximations given below may be used.
Material constant
3.3.2.2 Column
Columnss of rectan rectangul
gular
ar cross-
cross-sec tion. For
section Stress grade
Seasoned timber Unseasoned
Unseasoned timber
columns
columns of rectangula
rectangularr cross-secti
cross-section,
on, the slendernes
slendernesss
F34 1.26 1.44
coefficients may be taken as follows: F27 1.22 1.39
(a) Columns that can bend only about their major axis. F22 1.18 1.35
For
For the
the case
case of disc discre
rete
te rest
restrarain
intt syst
system
ems,s, the
the F17 1.13 1.30
slenderness coefficient, denoted by S 3, shall be taken F14 1.10 1.27
to be the lesser of the following: F11 1.06 1.22
F8 1.01 1.18
S 3 = Lax / d
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.14(
4(aa)) F7 0.98 1.15
and F5 0.95 1.11
S 3 = g13 L / d
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.14(
4(b)
b))) F4 0.91 1.07
where F3 0.88 1.04
Lax = the distance between points of F2 0.85 1.01
effectively rigid restraints against lateral
movement in the direction of the y-axis 3.3.
3.3.4
4 Allo
Allowawablblee nomi
nomina nall axia
axiall stre
stressss.. Allowable
as shown in Figure 3.4(a) compressio
compression n stress in a column
column is given by —
g13 = the coefficien
coefficientt given in Table 3.2.
f c ≤ F cx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.1
(3.19)
9)
For restra
restraint
int system
systemss that
that restra
restrain
in moveme
movement nt in the f c ≤ F cy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.20)
direct
direction
ion of the y-axis,
-axis, and are contin
continuou
uouss along
along the
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 22
where 3.5 COMBINED B E ND ING A ND A XIA L

f c = nominal
nominal compression
compression stress
stress in
in column
column STRESSES.
= P/A 3.5.
3.5.1
1 Comb
Combinined
ed bend
bendin
ing
g and
and comp
compre
ress
ssio
ion.
n. A
F cx, F cy = perm
permis
issi
sibl
blee compr
ompres
essi
sion
on stres
tresss for
for rectan
rectangul
gular
ar member
member with
with cross-
cross-sec
sectio
tion
n as shown
shown in
member as a column able to buckle only Figure 3.1 subject to combined axial compression and
about its major or minor axis respectively, bending about the x-axis only shall be proportioned so
(see Equation 3.13). that—
3.3.5 Strength of notched
notched columns.
columns. The appropriate
appropriate F cy) ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.22)
F bx)2 + ( f c / F
( f bx / F
desi
design
gn proc
proced
edur
uree for
for notc
notche
hed
d colu
column
mnss is give
given
n in ( f bx / F F cx) ≤ 1
F bx) + ( f c / F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.23)
Paragraph C10, Appendix C.
where
3.3.6 Spaced
Spaced columns.
columns. The slendernes
coefficientss
requir
required
ed for comput
computing
ing the design
design axial
axial streng
strength
th of f bx = M x / Z x = nominal bending stress about
spaced columns are given in Paragraph C6, Appendix C. the major axis
F bx = perm
permis
isssible
ible desi
design
gn valu
valuees of f bx
3.4 TENSION MEMBER DESIGN. (Equation
(Equation 3.1)
3.4.1 Axial stress
stress in tension
tension members.
members. In an axiall
axially y f c = P/A
P/A = nomi
nomina
nall comp
compre
ress
ssio
ion
n stre
stress
ss
loaded
loaded tensio
tensionn member
member,, the averag
averagee tensil
tensilee stress
stress(( f t), acting on column
calc
calcul
ulat
ated
ed on the the net
net area
area,, shal
shalll not
not exce
exceed
ed thethe
F cx, F cy = per
permissible design value of the
perm
permis
issi
sibl
blee stre
stress
ss in tens
tensio
ionn ( F t), dete
determ
rmin
ined
ed in
compression stress ( f c) if the member
accord
accordanc
ancee with
with Clause
Clause 2.4 for sawn
sawn and lamina
laminatedted
were
were used
used as a colu
column
mn that
that coul
could
d
timb
timber
er and
and for
for pole
poles.
s. (See
(See also
also Clau
Clause
se 3.5.
3.5.22 for
for
buckle only about its major or minor
comb
combinined
ed bend
bendin
ing
g and
and tens
tensio
ionn and
and Para
Paragr
grap
aphh C11,
C11,
axis respectively (see Equation 3.13)
Appendix C for notched tension members.)
NOTE: Equations 3.22 and 3.23 contain an allowance for the effect
For unnotched tension members, the permissible stress in of bendi
bending
ng mome
momentnt ampl
amplif
ific
icat
atio
ion
n due
due to the
the axia
axiall load
load.. For
For
tension shall be given by— non-rectangular members, Equations 3.22 and 3.23 may be used in
the absence of other information.
Ft = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.2
(3.21)
1) For the unusual
unusual case
case of a beam-c
beam-colu
olumn
mn subjec
subjected
ted to
bending simultaneously about both the x and y axes, a
where the factors k 1, to k 11, are given in Section 2.
conservative criterion of strength is given by Equation
3.4.
3.4.2
2 Slen
Slende
dern
rnes
esss coef
coeffi
fici
cien
ent.
t. The
The slen
slende
dern
rnes
esss C14, Appendix C.
coefficient for a tension member shall be defined as for
3.5.2 Combined
Combined bending
bending and tension.
tension. The nominal
nominal
columns in accordance with Clause 3.3.2.
bending stress f bx and axial stress f t of a member subject
3.4.3 Notched
Notched tension
tension members.
members. The appropriate
appropriate design
design to combin
combined
ed bendin
bending g and axial
axial tensio
tension n shall
shall be given
given
procedure for the design of notched tension members is by —
given in Paragraph C11 of Appendix C.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.2
(3.24)
4)
f bx - f t ≤ Fbx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.2

(3.25)
5)
where F t and F b are the permissible tension and bending
stresses for the member used as a tie or beam
respectively (see Equations 3.1 and 3.21)
COPYRIGHT
23 AS 1720.1—1988
SECTION
SECTION 4. CONNECTIO
CONNECTIONS
NS
4.1 GENERAL. Species for which α > 0.8 often have a high tendency to
4.1.1 Scope of section.
section. This Section applies to joints in split, particularly in exposed locations; species for which
soli
solid
d timb
timber
er fabr
fabric
icat
ated
ed with
with mech
mechan
anic
ical
al fast
fasten
ener
erss α < 0.55
0.55 may
may be cons
consid
ider
ered
ed to have
have a negl
neglig
igib
ible
le
described by Australian Standards and characterized by tendency to split.
a long history of use in timber structures. These include NOTES:
joints fabricated with the following mechanical fasteners: 1. Informa
Informatio
tion
n on shrinka
shrinkage
ge and cleava
cleavagege strengt
strengthh for specif
specific
ic
species can be obtained from the following:
(a) Nails.
Nails. (a) KINGSTON,
KINGSTON, R.S.T. and RISDON,RISDON, C.J.E.
C.J.E. ‘Shrinkag
‘Shrinkagee and
(b) Wood
Wood screws
screws.. Densit
Densityy of Austra
Australia
lian
n and other
other South-We
South-West st Pacifi
Pacificc
(c) Bolts.
Bolts. Woods’. Division
Division of Forest
Forest Products Technological
Technological Paper
No 13, CSIRO, 1961.
(d) Coach screws.
screws. (b) BUDGEON,
BUDGEON, B. ‘Shrinka
‘Shrinkage
ge and
and Density
Density of
of some Australian
Australian
(e) Split-ring
Split-ring connec
connectors.
tors. and South-E
South-Eastast Asian
Asian Timbers
Timbers’.’. Divisi
Division
on of Buildi
Building
ng
(f) Shear-plate
Shear-plate connectors
connectors.. Resear
Researchch Technol
Technologic
ogical
al Paper
Paper (Second
(Second Series
Series)) No 38,
NOTES: CSIRO, 1981.
1. Design
Design rules for specialized
specialized and patented mechanical
mechanical fasteners
fasteners (c) BOLZA,
BOLZA, E. andand KLOOT,
KLOOT, N.H.
N.H. ‘The Mechani
Mechanical cal Propert
Properties
ies
and for variants of conventional fasteners which will have been of 174 Australian
Australian Timbers’.
Timbers’. Division
Division of Forest Products
Products
subj
subjec
ecte
ted
d to test
testss spec
specif
ifie
ied
d in AS 1649,1649, will
will be give
givenn in Technological Paper No 25, CSIRO, 1963.
AS 1720.3. 2. It will be found that
that most Eucalypts
Eucalypts and most hardwoods
hardwoods of dry
2. This Standard
Standard does not specifically
specifically cover glued timber-to-ti
timber-to-timber
mber sclero
sclerophyl
phylll forests
forests that have a basic
basic density
density of less
less than
than 700
or timbe
timber-r-to
to-pl
-plyw
ywooood
d conne
connectctio
ions
ns as occu
occurr in fabr
fabric
icat
ated
ed kg/m3 will have a splitting parameter α > 0.8; most softwoods
compone
components nts such
such as stressed
stressed skin
skin panels
panels or plywood
plywood webbed and most
most rainfor
rainforest
est hardwo
hardwoods
ods have
have a splitt
splitting
ing paramet
parameterer
beams. In such cases, joint design can be based on the timber α < 0.8.
compo
compone nent
ntss in the
the conne
connect ctio
ion,
n, provi
provide
dedd that
that the
the join
jointt is 4.1.5 Eccentric
Eccentric joints.
joints. When
When it is impra
impract ctic
icab
able
le to
fabr
fabric
icat
ated
ed usin
using
g a rigi
rigid,
d, dura
durabl
blee adhe
adhesi
sive
ve.. Phen
Phenol
olic
ic type
type
adhesives
adhesives meet these requirements.
requirements. The design of fabricated
fabricated
ensu
ensurere that
that all
all the
the memb
member erss meet
meetin
ing
g at a joinjointt are
are
components
components comprising glued connections
connections is therefore
therefore based on arra
arrang
nged
ed symm
symmetetri
rica
call
lly,
y, with
with thei
theirr cent
centre
reli
line
ness
the fact that with correct bonding practice and quality control, a intersecting on a common axis which is also the axis of
joint is developed in which the adhesive bond strength and resi
resist
stan
ance
ce of the
the fast
fasten
ener
er or grou
group
p of fastfasten
ener
ers,
s, the
the
durability
durability will be superior
superior to the timber components
components comprising
comprising
combin
combined ed effects
effects of primar
primary y stress
stresses
es and second
secondaryary
the joint.
3. Joints with
with plywood are covered in Paragraph D1. InformationInformation stress
stresses
es due to the result
resulting
ing bendin
bendingg and shear
shear stress
stress
on methods for assessing the deformation of joints is given in shall be checked.
Paragraph
Paragraph D2.
4.1.2 Joint groups.
groups. For the purpos
purposee of joint
joint design
design,, 4.2 NAILED JOINTS.
timber species have been classified into six joint groups: 4.2.1 Lateral loads.
J1, J2, J3, J4, J5 and J6 for unseasoned timber and JD1,
JD2, JD3, JD4, JD5 and JD6 for seasoned timber. The 4.2.1.1 Basic working loads. The basic working loads for
joint group classifications for specific timbers are shown plain shank, low carbon steel nails specified in AS 2334,
in Tables 2.1 and 2.2. whether driven by hand or by gun, in single shear in
timber fabricated in the unseasoned condition are given
Where joints comprise more than one species of timber, in Table 4.1(A) and in timber fabricated in the seasoned
the
the desi
design
gn load
load to be used
used in the
the abse
absenc
ncee of othe
otherr condition in Table 4.1(B).
information is that appropriate to the weakest species in
the joint.
4.1.3 Timber
Timber grade.
grade. No allowance for grade of timber TABLE 4.1
has been made in design data for fasteners.
fasteners. Design loads LATERAL LOADS FOR ONE NAIL IN
for joints have been based on the assumption that there SINGLE SHEAR IN SIDE GRAIN
are no loose knots, severe sloping grain, gum veins, gum (comprising
(comprising Tables 4.1(A) and 4.1(B))
or rot pockets,
pockets, lyctus-susc
lyctus-susceptibl
eptiblee sapwood,
sapwood, corewood,
corewood, 4.1(A) UNSEASONED TIMBER
holes
holes or splits
splits near
near any fasten
fastener.
er. According
Accordingly,
ly, all of Basic working load per nail, N
these defects except for corewood Species
Nail diameter, mm
group
shall be avoided
avoided at fastener locations.
locations. Corewood
Corewood shall 2 .5 2. 8 3. 1 5 3 .7 5 4 .5 5 .0 5 .6
only be permitted
permitted at fastener
fastener locations
locations if the design joint J1 330 40 0 490 665 91 5 1 100 1 340
strength is taken to be that of a timber that is in a joint J2 260 31 5 385 525 72 0 870 1 060
group that is one lower than the normal value for the J3 185 22 5 275 375 51 5 620 755
species used. J4 130 16 0 195 265 36 5 440 540
J5 100 12 0 150 200 27 5 330 400
4.1.4 Tendency
Tendency to split.
split. Special
Special precautions
precautions shall be J6 75 90 110 150 21 0 250 300
specified in the use of timber that has a tendency to split
to an exte
extent
nt that
that may
may be detri
detrime
ment
ntal
al to conn
connec
ecto
torr 4.1(B) SEASONED TIMBER
strength. In the absence of other guidance, the criterion
for tendency to split shall be based on the parameter ∝ Species
Basic working load per nail, N
defined by— Nail diameter, mm
group
α = ε2 / γ
γ 2 .5 2. 8 3. 1 5 3 .7 5 4 .5 5 .0 5 .6
where JD1 435 53 0 650 885 1 210 1 460 1 780
ε = tangential
tangential shrinkage,
shrinkage, in percent
percent JD2 330 40 0 490 665 91 5 1 100 1 340
JD3 260 31 5 385 525 72 0 870 1 060
γ = tang
tangen
enti
tial
al clea
cleava
vage
ge stre
streng
ngth
th of unse
unseas
ason
oned
ed
JD4 185 22 5 275 375 51 5 620 755
timber, in newtons per millimetre (N/mm), as JD5 150 18 5 230 310 42 5 510 620
measured by BS 373 or ASTM D143. JD6 115 14 0 170 235 32 0 385 470
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 24
4.2.1.2 Permissible loads. The permissible load Q of a where

laterally
laterally loaded nail shall
shall be taken to be given by — r i = the
the dist
distan
ance
ce from
from the
the ith nail to the
Q = k1, k
k13 k14 k16 k17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.1
(4.1)) centroid of the nail group,
r max = the maxi
maximum
mum value
value of r i.
where
k 1 = the
the fac
factor
tor for
for dura
durati
tio
on of loadload give
givenn in Longit
Longitudi
udinal
nal and rotati
rotationa
onall joints
joints are illust
illustrat
rated
ed in
Table 2.5 Figure 4.1.
k 13 = 1.0
1.0 for
for nails
nails inin side
side grai
grain
n TABLE 4.2
= 0.6
0.6 for
for nail
nailss in end
end grai
grainn VALUES OF FACTOR k 17 FOR USE IN
k 14 = 1.0 for nail
nailss in single
single shear
shear THE DESIGN OF MULTIPLE NAIL AND
= 2.0 for nail
nailss in double
double shear
shear SCREW JOINTS
k 16 = 1.2 for
for nails
nails driven
driven through
through close fitting holes (Comprisin
(Comprising
g Tables 4.2(A) and 4.2(B))
into metal side plates 4.2(A) TO CARRY DIRECT LOADS
= 1.1 for
for nails driv
driven
en through
through plywo
plywood
od gusse
gussets
ts
= 1.0
1.0 othe
otherwrwis
isee Condition Values of k17
k 17 = factor
factor for multiple
multiple nailed
nailed joints
joints given
given in Table of Fasteners
timber na ≤ 4 n a ≥ 20
4.2(A)
4.2(A) for longit
longitudi
udinal
nal tensio
tensionn joints
joints and na = 5 na = 10
Table 4.2(B) for rotational joints Unseasoned 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.75
Q′ = basi
basicc worki
workingng load given
given in Tables
Tables 4.1(A)
4.1(A) Seasoned 1.00 0.94 0.90 0.85
and 4.1(B) n a = total number
number of rows of fasteners per interface
interface (see
Figure 4.1(a))
For longitudinal joints containing n nails, P n, the design
load
load capaci
capacity
ty of the joint,
joint, shall be taken
taken to be given 4.2(B) TO CARRY IN-PLANE MOMENTS
MOMENTS
by —
na k 17
Pn = nQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.
(4.2)
2 1.00
For rotational joints containing n nails, M n, the design 5 1.05
in-plane moment capacity of the joint shall be taken to 10 1.10
be given by— 20 1.15
100 or greater 1.20
M n = . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.3
(4.3)) na = number of nails per interfac r max ≥ 0.7
interfacee for which r /
i r
r i = distance from i th nail to centroid of nail group
distance from
r max = maximum
maximum value
value of r
of r i. (See Figure
Figure 4.1(b))
FIGURE
FIGURE 4.1. ILLUSTRAT
ILLUSTRATION
ION OF A LONGITUDIN
LONGITUDINAL
AL AND ROTATIONA
ROTATIONAL
L JOINT
COPYRIGHT
25 AS 1720.1—1988
4.2.1.3 Spacin
Spacing,
g, edge
edge and end distan ces.. Table
distances Table 4.3 4.2.1.5 Avoidance splitting. The basic loads for nails
Avoidance of splitting.
provides
provides recommended
recommended minimum spacings,
spacings, edge and end have been derived on the assumption that splitting of the
distan
distances
ces for nails
nails in terms
terms of nail
nail diamet
diameter
er D. For timb
timberer does
does not
not occu
occurr to any
any sign
signif
ific
ican
antt exte
extent
nt.. In
spacings
spacings at an angle to the grain, interpolation
interpolation by means unseasoned timber which shows a marked tendency to
of Hankinson’s formula may be used. split
split (see
(see Clause
Clause 4.1.4),
4.1.4), the use of prebor
preboreded holes
holes of
NOTE: For timber that has a tendency to split (see Clause 4.1.4) diameter 80 percent of the nail diameter is
some mitigation measure such as preboring or increased spacing is recommended.
recommended. The fabrication of prototype joints is a useful method
of checking the efficacy of mitigation measures. 4.2.2 Withdrawal loads.
4.2.2.1 Basic working loads. The basic working loads in
TABLE 4.3 withdr
withdrawa
awall for plain
plain shank,
shank, low carbon
carbon steel nails as
MINIMUM SPACING, EDGE AND END specified in AS 2334 driven by hand, into side grain of
DISTANCES FOR NAILS unseasoned timber are given in Table 4.4(A) and from
Minimum distance side grain of seasoned timber are given in Table 4.4(B).
Spacing type Holes prebored to NOTE: Withdrawal loads for gun-driven plain shank nails may be
Holes not prebored 80 percent of nail considerably
considerably less than withdrawal
withdrawal loads for the same nails driven
driven by
diameter hand.
End distance 20 D
20 D 10 D
10 D TABLE 4.4
Edge distance 5 D 5 D
WITHDRAWAL LOADS FOR PLAIN SHANK
Between nails STEEL NAILS IN SIDE GRAIN
— along grain
grain 20 D
20 D 10 D
10 D
(Comprisin
(Comprising
g Tables 4.4(A) and 4.4(B))
— across grain
grain 10 D
10 D 3 D
4.4 (A) UNSEASONED
UNSEASONED TIMBER
4.2.1.4 Nail length and timber thickness. For the basic Basic working load, N per mm penetration of nail
loads given in Tables 4.1(A) and 4.1(B) to be applicable, Species
Nail diameter, mm
timber thicknesses and nail length as shown in Figure 4.2 group
2 .5 2. 8 3 .1 5 3. 75 4. 5 5 .0 5 .6
shall be as follows:
J1 11 12 14 16 19 21 24
(a) Two-member
Two-member joints (nails shear). Thickness
(nails in single shear). J2 8.9 10 11 13 16 18 20
of first member, t 1 > 10 D, depth of penetration of J3 7.6 8.5 9.6 11 14 15 17
nail into second member, t p > 10 D.
J4 6.7 7.5 8.4 10 12 13 15
For lesser values of t 1 and t p, the basic load shall be J5 5.4 6.0 6.8 8 10 11 12
reduce
reducedd in propor
proportio
tion n to the decrea
decrease
se in t 1 or t p J6 4.0 4.5 5.1 6 7 8 9
(whichever gives the greater decrease), and the nails
shall be considered as non-loadbearing if t 1 or t p is 4.4(B) SEASONED TIMBER
less than 5 D. Basic working load, N per mm penetration of nail
Species
(b) Thre
Three-
e-me
memb
mber
er join
joints
ts (nai
(nails
ls in doub
double
le shea
shear)
r).. group
Nail diameter, mm
Thickness of central member, t m > 10 D, thickness
thickness of 2 .5 2. 8 3 .1 5 3. 75 4. 5 5 .0 5 .6
outer member, t o > 7.5 D, depth of penetration
penetration of nail JD1 17 19 21 25 30 34 38
into outer member, t p > 7.5 D. JD2 12 13 15 17 21 23 26
JD3 7.6 8.5 9.6 11 14 15 17
For lesser values of t m, t o and t p, the basic load shall
be reduced in proportion to the decrease in t m, t o and JD4 4.9 5.5 6.2 7.4 8.8 9.8 11
t p (whichever gives the greatest decrease), and the JD5 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.7 5.6 6.3 7
JD6 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.3 4. 4.5 5
nails shall be regarded as being in single shear if t p
is less than 5 D.
FIGURE
FIGURE 4.2. TIMBER
TIMBER THICKNESSES
THICKNESSES AND FASTENER
FASTENER LENGTHS
LENGTHS FOR
NAILS, WOOD SCREWS AND COACH SCREWS
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 26
4.2.2.2 Permissible loads. The permissible load Q of a k 16 = 1.2

1.2 wher
wheree the
the load
load is appl
applie
ied
d thro
throug
ugh
h
single nail in withdrawal from side grain shall be taken metal
metal sidepl
sideplate
atess of adequa
adequate
te streng
strength
th to
to be given
given by — transfer the load and the screws are a close
fit to the holes in these plates
Q = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.
(4.4)
= 1.0
1.0 othe
otherw
rwis
isee
where k 17 = fact
factor
or for multip
multiple le scre
screw
w joints
joints given
given in
= the basic
basic work
working
ing load
load in withdr
withdrawa
awall give
given
n Tables 4.2(A) and 4.2(B)
in Tables 4.4(A) and 4.4(B). = basic
basic work
working
ing load
load give
given
n in Table
Tabless 4.5(A
4.5(A))
and 4.5(B)
4.3 SCREWED JOINTS.
4.3.1.3 Spacin
Spacing,
g, edge
edge and end distan ces. Tabl
distances Tablee 4.6
4.6
4.3.1 Lateral loads. provides recommended minimum spacings, edge and end
4.3.1.1 Basic working loads . The basic working loads for dist
distan
ance
cess for
for scre
screws
ws stat
stated
ed in term
termss of the
the shan
shank
k
plai
plain
n stee
steell wood
wood scre
screws
ws as spec
specif
ifie
ied
d in AS 1476
1476,, diameter D.
whether driven by hand or by machine, in single shear in TABLE 4.6
unseas
unseasone
onedd timber
timber are given in Table
Table 4.5(A)
4.5(A) and in MINIMUM SPACING, EDGE AND END
seasoned timber are given in Table 4.5(B). DISTANCES FOR SCREWS
NOTE:
NOTE: In the absenc
absencee of specific
specific data,
data, these
these loads may also be
used for other forms of steel screws intended for the fabrication of Minimum
Spacing
Spacing Type
timber joints. Loads for other diameters may be derived by linear distance
interpolation in direct proportion to diameters raised to the power End distance 10 D
10 D
of 1.75. Edge distance 5 D
TABLE 4.5 Between screws
LATERAL LOAD FOR ONE STEEL WOOD — along grain
grain 10 D
10 D
SCREW IN SINGLE SHEAR IN SIDE GRAIN — across grain
grain 3 D
(Comprisin
(Comprising
g Tables 4.5(A) and 4.5(B)) D = shank diameter of screws.
4.5(A) UNSEASONED TIMBER For
For spac
spacin
ings
gs at an angl
anglee to the
the grai
grain,
n, inte
interp
rpol
olat
atio
ion
n
Basic working load per screw, N according to Hankinson’s formula may be used.
Screw size number
Species
4.3.1.4 Screw length and timber thickness . For the basic
4 6 8 10 12 14 18 working loads given in Tables 4.5(A) and 4.5(B) to be
group
Shank diameter, mm applicable, timber thicknesses and
and screw length as shown
2. 7 4 3 .4 5 4 .1 7 4. 8 8 5 .5 9 6 .3 0 7. 7 2 for nails in Figure 4.2(a) shall be such
such that —
J1 380 58 0 80 0 1 060 1 340 1 650 2 360 (a) thickness
thickness of
of first member,
member, t 1 > 10 D; and
J2 300 45 0 63 0 83 0 1 060 1 300 1 860
(b) depth of penetration
penetration into second
second member, t p > 7 D.
J3 210 32 0 45 0 60 0 75 0 930 1 330
J4 150 23 0 32 0 42 0 53 0 660 94 0 For lesser
lesser values
values of t 1 and t p, the basic load shall be
J5 110 17 0 23 0 30 0 39 0 480 68 0 reduced in proportion to the decrease in t 1, or t p and the
J6 70 11 0 15 0 20 0 25 0 310 44 0 screw shall be considered as non-load-bearing if t 1 or t p
is less than 4 D.
4.5(B) SEASONED TIMBER
4.3.1.5 Preboring. The values given in Tables 4.5(A) and
Basic working load per screw, N
4.5(B) apply when the correct size lead holes have been
Screw size number
Species bored. The diameter of the hole for the shank must be
4 6 8 10 12 14 18 equal to the diameter of the shank, and the lead hole for
group
Shank diameter, mm the threaded portion of the screw must not be greater
2. 7 4 3 .4 5 4 .1 7 4. 8 8 5 .5 9 6 .3 0 7. 7 2 than the root diameter of the screw.
JD1 510 76 0 1 060 1 400 1 780 2 190 3 130 4.3.2 Withdrawal loads.
JD2 380 58 0 800 1 060 1 340 1 650 2 360
JD3 300 45 0 630 83 0 1 060 1 300 1 860 4.3.2.1 Basic working loads. The basic working loads for
JD4 210 32 0 450 60 0 75 0 930 1 330 plain wood screws as specified in AS 1476 (driven by
JD5 150 23 0 320 42 0 53 0 660 94 0 hand or by machine), from the side grain of unseasoned
JD6 110 17 0 230 30 0 39 0 480 68 0 timber
timber are given in Table 4.7(A) and of seasoned
seasoned timber
timber
in Table 4.7(B). As for lateral loads, in the absence of
specif
specific
ic data
data these
these loads
loads may also
also be used
used for other
other
forms of screws.
The maximum working load that may be applied to any
4.3.1.2 Permissible loads. The permissible load Q for a one screw shall not exceed the value appropriate to the
laterally loaded screw shall be taken to be given by — diameter and metal from rom which the screw is
Q = k1 k13 k16 k17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.5
(4.5)) manufa
manufactu
ctured
red as given
given in Table
Table 4.8.
4.8. Loads
Loads for other
other
diameters may be obtained by linear interpolation in all
where tables.
k 1 = the
the fact
factor
or for durat
duratio
ion
n of load
load given
given in The basic working loads for wood screws driven into end
Table 2.5 grain shall not exceed 60 percent of the values given in
k 13 = 1.0
1.0 for
for scre
screws
ws in
in side
side gra
grain
in Tables 4.7(A) and 4.7(B).
= 0.6
0.6 for
for scre
screws
ws in end
end gra
grain
in
COPYRIGHT
27 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 4.7 Reference shall be made to Paragraph D3, Appendix D for

WITHDRAWAL LOADS FOR PLAIN equations for computing basic working loads for values of
WOOD SCREWS IN SIDE GRAIN bolt diameters and effective timber thicknesses that are not
(Comprising
(Comprising Tables 4.7(A) and 4.7(B)) included in Tables 4.9 and 4.10.
4.7(A) UNSEASONED TIMBER 4.4.2 Lateral loads.
Basic working load, N per mm penetration of thread 4.4.2.1 Basic working load parallel to the grain . The basic
Screw size number work
workin
ing
g loa
load
d for
for a sin
singl
glee bolt
bolt bear
bearin
ing
g par
paral
alle
lell to the
the
Species
4 6 8 10 12 14 18
group grain and acting in single shear is given for a selection of
Shank diameter, mm bolt
bolt diam
diamet
eter
erss and
and effe
effect
ctiv
ivee timb
timber
er thic
thickn
knes
esse
sess in
2 .7 4 3 .4 5 4 .1 7 4 .8 8 5 .5 9 6 . 30 7 . 72 Tables 4.9(B) and 4.9(C).
J1 29 37 44 52 60 67 82
J2 22 28 34 40 46 52 63 4.4.2.2 Basic
Basic working perpendicular to the grain. The
working load perpendicular
J3 17 21 26 30 34 39 47 basic w or
orking load for a s in
ingle bolt b eaearing
J4 12 16 19 22 25 28 35 perpendicular to the grain and acting in single shear is given
J5 10 13 15 18 21 23 28 for
for a sele
select
ctio
ion
n of bolt
bolt diam
diamet
eter
erss and
and effe
effect
ctiv
ivee timb
timber
er
J6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 thicknesses in Tables 4.10(B) and 4.10(C).
4.7(B) SEASONED TIMBER 4.4.2.3 Basic working load for a bolted joint system. The
Basic working load, N per mm penetration of thread
basic working load for a bolted joint system, denoted by
Screw size number is derived as follows:
Species
4 6 8 10 12 14 18 (a) For systems loaded parallel to the grain ,
group
Shank diameter, mm
2 .7 4 3 .4 5 4. 1 7 4 . 88 55 9 6 . 30 7. 72
where
where is the system
system capaci
capacity
ty given
given in Table
Table 4.9(A
4.9(A).
).
JD1 42 53 65 76 87 98 12 0 (b)
(b) For
For syst
system
emss load
loaded
ed perp
perpen
endi
dicu
cula
larr to the
the grai
grain,
n,
JD2 32 41 50 58 66 75 92 , wher
wheree is the
the syst
system
em capa
capaci
city
ty give
given
n in
JD3 25 32 38 45 52 58 71
Table 4. 10(A).
JD4 19 24 29 34 39 44 54 (c) For systems
systems loaded
loaded at an angle to the grain,
grain, the system
JD5 15 19 23 27 31 35 43 capaci
capacity
ty is given
given by use of Hankin
Hankinson
son’s
’s formula
formula as
JD6 12 15 18 21 24 27 33
follows—
= . . . . . . (4.7
(4.7))
TABLE 4.8
Hankin
Hankinson
son’s
’s formul
formulaa is conven
convenien
iently
tly evalua
evaluated
ted by
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WITHDRAWAL
means of the nomograms given in Figures 4.3 to 4.6.
LOAD PER SCREW
Maximum permissible withdrawal load, N 4.4.2.4 Permissib le loads. The permis
Permissible permissib
sible
le load
load Q s of a
late
latera
rall
lly
y load
loaded
ed bolt
bolt syst
system
em shal
shalll be take
taken
n to
to be give
given
n
Metal Screw size number
by —
4 6 8 10 12 14 18
Qs = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.
(4.8)
Steel
Steel and 18/8 7 30
30 1 1 10
10 1 6 50
50 2 2 70
70 2 9 60
60 3 7 80
80 5 6 00
00
stainless steel where
k 1 = factor
factor for duratio
duration n of load
load given in Table 2.5 2.5
Brass and 560 8 5 0 1 2 7 0 1 7 50 2 2 80 2 9 10 4 3 1 0 k 16 = 1.2
1.2 for boltboltss that
that tran
transf
sfer
er load
load thro
throug
ugh
h meta
metall
silicon bronze
sideplates of adequate strength, and the bolts are
Al u m in
in i u m a llo y 4 30
30 6 50
50 9 7 0 1 3 40
40 1 7 40
40 2 2 30
30 3 3 00
00 a close fit to the holes in these plates provided
that b / D > 5 for loads acting parallel to the grain
and b / D > 10 for loads acting perpendicular to
4.3.2.2 Permissibl
Permissiblee loads. The permis
permissib
sible
le load
load Q for
for a the grain (where b denotes the effective timber
screw in withdrawal shall be taken to be given by the lesser thickness and D is the bolt diameter)
of the value given
given in Table
Table 4.8 and the value — = 1.0 otherw
otherwiseise
k 17 = fact
factor
or forfor mult
multipiple
le bolt
bolted
ed join
jointt give
given
n in Tabl
Tablee
Q = k13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.6
(4.6)) 4.11
where
= basic working
working load as derived
derived in Clause 4.4.2.
4.4.2.3.
3.
k 13 = 1.0
1.0 for
for scre
screws
ws in
in side
side gra
grain
in
= 0.6
0.6 for
for scre
screws
ws in end
end gra
grain
in 4.4.2.5 Spacings, distances. Spacings, edge
Spacings, edge and end distances
= basi
basicc workin
working
g load for
for wood
wood scre
screws
ws in side
side and
and end
end dist
distan
ance
cess shal
shalll comp
comply
ly with
with the
the foll
follow
owin
ing
g
grain, given in Tables 4.7(A) and 4.7(B). requirements:
(a) Loads parallel to grain . The basic working loads given
4.4 BOLTED JOINTS.
in Tables 4.10(A), 4.10(B) and 4.10(C) apply to joints
4.4.1 General. The basic
basic workin
workingg loads
loads given
given in Clause
Clausess in which the edge, end and between-fastener spacings
4.4.2.1 and 4.4.2.2 are applicable to steel bolts as specified are not less
less than
than those
those shown
shown in Figure
Figure 4.7(a).
4.7(a). The
in AS 1111,
1111, when
when fitted
fitted into
into prebor
prebored
ed holes
holes of diamet
diameter
er distance a indi
indica
cate
ted
d in the
the figu
figure
re shal
shalll be at leas
leastt
approximatel
approximatelyy 10 percent
percent greater than the bolt diameter and (n - 2) D with a minimum of 2.5 D, where n is the total
when fitted with washers as given in Clause 4.4.2.6.
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 28
number of bolts in the joint and D is the diameter of the (b) Loads perpendicular to grain. The minimum edge, end
bolt. and betwee
between-f
n-fast
astene
enerr spacin
spacingsgs shall
shall not be less
less than
than
Similarly, the required end distance lpar shall be at least those shown in Figure 4.7(b). The distance a shall be at
8 D in tension joints in unseasoned timber, 7 D in tension least 2.5 D for a b / D ratio of 2, and it shall be increased
joints in seasoned timber, and 5 D in compression joints proportionately so that it is at least 5 D for a b / D ratio
and
and in join
joints
ts subj
subjec
ectt to bend
bendining
g mome
moment
nt for
for both
both of 6 or more, where b is the thickness of the member
moisture conditions. However, lesser end distances may loaded perpendicular to the grain.
be used in tension joints provided that the basic load is (c) Loads acting at an angle to the grain. For loads acting
reduced in proportion to the reduction in end distance. at an angle 0° to 30° to the grain, the spacings, edge
Neve
Neverth
rthel
eles
ess,
s, in no case
case shal
shalll the
the end
end dist
distan
ance
ce for and end distances may be taken as for loads parallel to
tension joints be less than 6 D for unseasoned timber and the grain. For loads acting at an angle of 30 ° to 90° to
5 D for seasoned timber. the grain, the spacings, edge and end distances may be
taken as for loads acting perpendicular to the grain.
TABLE 4.9
BASIC WORKING LOADS FOR SINGLE BOLTS PARALLEL TO GRAIN
(comprisin
(comprising
g Tables
Tables 4.9(A),
4.9(A), 4.9(B) and 4.9(C))
4.9(C))
4.9(A) SYSTEM CAPACITY
System capacity
Type of joint Effective timber thickness
1. Two member Smaller of t

t 1 and t 2
2. Three member Smaller

Smaller of t 2 and 2 t 1
2
3. Multiple member (i) Between A and B—

smaller of t 1 and t 2 (i)
(ii)
(ii) Betw
Betwee
een
n B and and C—
C—
smaller of t 2 and t 3
(iii)
(iii) etc (ii)
(iii) etc
= sum o f
basic loads
(i), (ii), etc
COPYRIGHT
29 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 4.9(B)
IN UNSEASONED TIMBER: PARALLEL TO GRAIN
Effective Basi
Basicc work
workin
ing
g load
load ,N
Joint timber
group thickness Bolt diameter
mm M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
J1 25 980 1650 2100 2500 3300 4100 5000 6200 7400
38 980 1740 2700 3800 5000 6300 7500 9400 11300
50 980 1740 2700 3900 6600 8300 9900 12400 14900
75 980 1740 2700 3900 7000 10900 14900 18600 22000
100 980 1740 2700 3900 7000 10900 15700 25000 30000
150 980 1740 2700 3900 7000 10900 15700 25000 35000
200 980 1740 2700 3900 7000 10900 15700 25000 35000
J2 25 820 1300 1630 1950 2600 3300 3900 4900 5900
38 820 1460 2300 3000 4000 4900 5900 7400 8900
50 820 1460 2300 3300 5200 6500 7800 9800 11700
75 820 1460 2300 3300 5800 9100 11700 14600 17600
100 820 1460 2300 3300 5800 9100 13100 19500 23000
150 820 1460 2300 3300 5800 9100 13100 20000 29000
200 820 1460 2300 3300 5800 9100 13100 20000 29000
J3 25 760 1050 1310 1580 2100 2600 3200 3900 4700
38 760 1340 2000 2400 3200 4000 4800 6000 7200
50 760 1340 2100 3000 4200 5300 6300 7900 9500
75 760 1340 2100 3000 5400 7900 9500 11800 14200
100 760 1340 2100 3000 5400 8400 12100 15800 18900
150 760 1340 2100 3000 5400 8400 12100 18900 27000
200 760 1340 2100 3000 5400 8400 12100 18900 27000
J4 25 600 830 1040 1250 1660 2100 2500 3100 3700
38 600 1060 1580 1890 2500 3200 3800 4700 5700
50 600 1060 1660 2400 3300 4200 5000 6200 7500
75 600 1060 1660 2400 4200 6200 7500 9300 11200
100 600 1060 1660 2400 4200 6600 9600 12500 14900
150 600 1060 1660 2400 4200 6600 9600 14900 22000
200 600 1060 1660 2400 4200 6600 9600 14900 22000
J5 25 500 660 830 990 1320 1650 1980 2500 3000
38 520 930 1250 1500 2000 2500 3000 3800 4500
50 520 930 1450 1980 2600 3300 4000 5000 5900
75 520 930 1450 2100 3700 5000 5900 7400 8900
100 520 930 1450 2100 3700 5800 7900 9900 11900
150 520 930 1450 2100 3700 5800 8400 13100 17800
200 520 930 1450 2100 3700 5800 8400 13100 18800
J6 25 400 530 660 800 1060 1330 1590 1990 2400
38 460 810 1010 1210 1610 2000 2400 3000 3600
50 460 810 1270 1590 2100 2700 3200 4000 4800
75 460 810 1270 1830 3200 4000 4800 6000 7200
100 460 810 1270 1830 3300 5100 6400 8000 9500
150 460 810 1270 1830 3300 5100 7300 11400 14300
200 460 810 1270 1830 3300 5100 7300 11400 16500
TABLE 4.9(C)
IN SEASONED TlMBER: PARALLEL TO GRAIN
Effective Basi
Basicc work
workin
ing
g load
load ,N
Joint timber
mm
M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
JD1 20 1200 1640 2100 2500 3300 4100 4900 6200 7400
30 1200 2200 3100 3700 4900 6200 7400 9200 11100
40 1200 2200 3400 4900 6600 8200 9800 12300 14800
50 1200 2200 3400 4900 8200 10300 12300 15400 18500
70 1200 2200 3400 4900 8700 13500 17200 22000 26000
85 1200 2200 3400 4900 8700 13500 19500 26000 31400
100 1200 2200 3400 4900 8700 13500 19500 30000 37000
JD2 20 990 1320 1650 1980 2600 3300 4000 5000 5900
30 1040 1850 2500 3000 4000 5000 5900 7400 8900
40 1040 1850 2900 4000 5300 6600 7900 9900 11900
50 1040 1850 2900 4200 6600 8300 9900 12400 14900
70 1040 1850 2900 4200 7400 11600 13900 17300 21000
85 1040 1850 2900 4200 7400 11600 16600 21000 25000
100 1040 1850 2900 4200 7400 11600 16600 25000 30000
JD3 20 780 1040 1300 1560 2100 2600 3100 3900 4700
30 940 1560 1950 2300 3100 3900 4700 5900 7000
40 940 1660 2600 3100 4200 5200 6200 7800 9400
50 940 1660 2600 3700 5200 6500 7800 9800 11700
70 940 1660 2600 3700 6700 9100 10900 13700 16400
85 940 1660 2600 3700 6700 10400 13300 16600 19900
100 940 1660 2600 3700 6700 10400 15000 19500 23000
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 30
TABLE 4.9(C) (continued )
Effective Basi
Basicc work
workin
ing
g load
load ,N
Joint timber
mm M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
JD4 20 630 840 1050 1260 1680 2100 2500 3200 3800
30 760 1260 1580 1890 2500 3200 3800 4700 5700
40 760 1340 2100 2500 3400 4200 5000 6300 7600
50 760 1340 2100 3000 4200 5300 6300 7900 9500
70 760 1340 2100 3000 5400 7400 8800 11000 13200
85 760 1340 2100 3000 5400 8400 10700 13400 16100
100 760 1340 2100 3000 5400 8400 12100 15800 18900
JD5 20 500 660 830 1000 1330 1660 1990 2500 3000
30 660 1000 1250 1490 1990 2500 3000 3700 4500
40 660 1170 1660 1990 2700 3300 4000 5000 6000
50 660 1170 1830 2500 3300 4200 5000 6200 7500
70 660 1170 1830 2600 4600 5800 7000 8700 10500
85 660 1170 1830 2600 4700 7100 8500 10600 12700
100 660 1170 1830 2600 4700 7300 10000 12500 14900
JD6 20 400 530 660 790 1060 1320 1580 1980 2400
30 570 790 990 1190 1580 1980 2400 3000 3600
40 570 1010 1320 1580 2100 2600 3200 4000 4800
50 570 1010 1580 1980 2600 3300 4000 5000 5900
70 570 1010 1580 2300 3700 4600 5500 6900 8300
85 570 1010 1580 2300 4100 5600 6700 8400 10100
100 570 1010 1580 2300 4100 6300 7900 9900 11900
TABLE
TABLE 4.10
BASIC WORKING LOADS FOR SINGLE BOLTS
PERPENDICULAR TO THE GRAIN
(Comprisin
(Comprising
g Tables
Tables 4.10(A),
4.10(A), 4.10(B),
4.10(B), and 4.10(C))
4.10(C))
4.10(A) SYSTEM CAPACITY
System capacity
Type of joint Effective timber thickness
1. Two member 2t 1
2. Three member, Type A t 2

2
3. Three member, Type B 2t 1

2
4. Multiple member (i) — t 2

Between A and B —t
(ii)
(ii) Betwe
Between
en B and
and C— t 2 (i)
(iii)
(iii) Between C and D— t 4
Between
(iv)
(iv) Etc
Etc (ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(iv) Etc.
Etc.
= sum
sum of bas basic
ic loads
loads
(i), (ii), (iii), etc
NOTE: At each interface, the strength of the bolted joint with respect to the member aligned parallel to the
direction of the stress must be checked according to Table 4.9.
COPYRIGHT
31 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 4.10(B)
IN UNSEASONED TIMBER: PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN
Effective Basi
Basicc work
workin
ing
g load
load ,N
Joint timber
mm M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
J1 25 500 660 830 990 1320 1650 1980 2500 3000
38 750 1000 1250 1500 2000 2500 3000 3800 4500
50 970 1320 1650 1980 2600 3300 4000 5000 5900
75 970 1490 2100 2700 4000 5000 5900 7400 8900
100 970 1490 2100 2700 4200 5900 7800 9900 11900
150 970 1490 2100 2700 4200 5900 7800 10800 14300
200 970 1490 2100 2700 4200 5900 7800 10800 14300
J2 25 390 520 650 780 1040 1330 1560 1950 2300
38 590 790 990 1190 1580 1980 2400 3000 3600
50 780 1040 1300 1560 2100 2600 3100 3900 4700
75 920 1410 1950 2300 3100 3900 4700 5900 7000
100 920 1410 1970 2600 4000 5200 6200 7800 9400
150 920 1410 1970 2600 4000 5600 7300 10300 13500
200 920 1410 1970 2600 4000 5600 7300 10300 13500
J3 25 250 330 410 500 660 830 990 1240 1490
38 380 500 630 750 1000 1250 1500 1880 2300
50 500 660 830 990 1320 1650 1980 2500 3000
75 730 990 1240 1490 1980 2500 3000 3700 4500
100 730 1120 1570 1980 2600 3300 4000 5000 5900
150 730 1120 1570 2100 3200 4400 5800 7400 8900
200 730 1120 1570 2100 3200 4400 5800 8100 10700
J4 25 157 210 260 310 420 520 630 790 940
38 240 320 400 480 640 800 960 1200 1440
50 310 420 520 630 840 1050 1260 1570 1890
75 470 630 790 950 1260 1580 1890 2400 2800
100 520 810 1050 1260 1680 2100 2500 3100 3800
150 520 810 1130 1480 2300 3200 3800 4700 5700
200 520 810 1130 1480 2300 3200 4200 5900 7600
J5 25 105 140 175 210 280 350 420 530 630
38 159 210 270 320 430 530 640 800 960
50 210 280 350 420 560 700 840 1050 1260
75 320 420 530 630 840 1050 1260 1580 1890
100 390 560 700 840 1120 1400 1680 2100 2500
150 390 600 840 1110 1680 2100 2500 3200 3800
200 390 600 840 1110 1700 2400 3100 4200 5000
J6 25 52 70 87 105 140 175 210 260 320
38 79 106 133 159 210 270 320 400 480
50 105 140 175 210 280 350 420 530 630
75 157 210 260 320 420 530 630 790 950
100 195 280 350 420 560 700 840 1050 1260
150 195 300 420 550 840 1050 1260 1580 1890
200 195 300 420 550 850 1190 1560 2100 2500
TABLE 4.10(C)
IN SEASONED TIMBER: PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN
Effective Basi
Basicc work
workin
ing
g load
load ,N
Joint timber
mm M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
JD1 20 520 700 870 1040 1390 1740 2100 2600 3100
30 780 1040 1310 1570 2100 2600 3100 3900 4700
40 1040 1390 1740 2100 2800 3500 4200 5200 6300
50 1280 1740 2200 2600 3500 4400 5200 6500 7800
70 1280 1970 2800 3600 4900 6100 7300 9100 11000
85 1280 1970 2800 3600 5600 7400 8900 11100 13300
100 1280 1970 2800 3600 5600 7800 10200 13100 15700
JD2 20 400 540 670 800 1070 1340 1610 2000 2400
30 600 800 1010 1210 1610 2000 2400 3000 3600
40 800 1070 1340 1610 2100 2700 3200 4000 4800
50 1010 1340 1680 2000 3700 3400 4000 5000 6000
70 1180 1820 2300 2800 3800 4700 5600 7000 8400
85 1180 1820 2500 3300 4600 5700 6800 8500 10300
100 1180 1820 2500 3300 5100 6700 8000 10100 12100
JD3 20 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500 1800
30 450 600 750 900 1200 1500 1800 2300 2700
40 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2400 3000 3600
50 750 1000 1250 1500 2000 2800 3000 3800 4500
70 1050 1400 1750 2100 2800 3500 4200 5300 6300
85 1100 1700 2100 2600 3400 4300 5100 6400 7700
100 1100 1700 2400 3000 4000 5000 6000 7500 9000
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 32
TABLE 4.10(C) (continued )
Effective Basi
Basicc work
workin
ing
g load
load ,N
Joint timber
mm
M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
JD4 20 220 300 370 440 590 740 890 1110 1330
30 330 440 560 670 890 1110 1330 1670 2000
40 440 590 740 890 1180 1480 1780 2200 2700
50 560 740 930 1110 1480 1850 2200 2800 3300
70 780 1040 1300 1550 2100 2600 3100 3900 4700
85 920 1260 1570 1890 2500 3100 3800 4700 5700
100 920 1420 1850 2200 3000 3700 4400 5600 6700
JD5 20 156 210 260 310 420 520 620 780 940
30 230 310 390 470 620 780 940 1170 1400
40 310 420 520 620 830 1040 1300 1560 1870
50 390 520 650 780 1040 1300 1560 1950 2300
70 550 730 910 1090 1460 1820 2200 2700 3300
85 660 880 1100 1330 1770 2200 2700 3300 4000
100 780 1040 1300 1560 2100 2600 3100 3900 4700
JD6 20 108 144 180 220 290 360 430 540 650
30 162 220 270 320 430 540 650 810 970
40 220 290 360 430 580 720 860 1080 1300
50 270 360 450 540 720 900 1080 1350 1620
70 380 500 630 760 1010 1260 1510 1890 2300
85 460 610 770 920 1220 1530 1840 2300 2800
100 540 720 900 1080 1440 1800 2200 2700 3200
FIGURE
FIGURE 4.3. MOGRAM
MOGRAM FOR HANKINSON
HANKINSON’S
’S FORMULA,
FORMULA, RANGE I
COPYRIGHT
33 AS 1720.1—1988
FIGURE
FIGURE 4.4. NOMOGRAM
NOMOGRAM FOR HANKINSON’S
HANKINSON’S FORMULA,
FORMULA, RANGE II
FIGURE
FORMULA, RANGE III
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 34
TABLE
TABLE 4.11
VALUE OF k17, FOR USE IN THE DESIGN OF MULTIPLE CONNECTOR
JOINTS OF BOLTS, COACH SCREWS, SPLIT RINGS AND SHEAR PLATES
Values of k17
Type of joint
na ≤ 4 na = 5 na = 10 na = 15 na ≥ 16
Seasoned timber 1.0 1.0 1. 0 1.0 1 .0
Unseasoned
Unseasoned timber (no transverse
transverse 1.0 0.95 0.80 0 .5 5 0. 5 0
restraint*)
Unseasoned timber (transverse 0.5 0.5 0. 5 0.5 0. 5

restraint*)
na = total number
number of rows of fasteners
fasteners per interface.
interface.
* The term
term ‘transv
‘transvers
ersee restrain
restraint’
t’ refers
refers to the possib
possibili
ility
ty of restrai
restraint
nt to timber
timber shrink
shrinkage
age due to the joint
joint
detail.
FIGURE
FORMULA, RANGE IV
COPYRIGHT
35 AS 1720.1—1988
FIGURE
FIGURE 4.7. SPACINGS,
SPACINGS, EDGE AND END DISTANCE
DISTANCES
S FOR
BOLTED JOINTS
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 36
4.4.2.6 Washers. In all timber-to-timber bolted structural diameter, whichever is the lesser. The diameter of the
joints, every bolt shall be provided with a washer at each hole for the threaded portion of the screw shall not
end, of a size not less than in Table 4.12. exceed the root diameter of the screw.
If smaller washers are used then the basic working load The
The deptdepth h of the
the hole
hole shal
shalll not
not be lessless than
than the
the
given in Clause 4.4.2 shall be reduced in proportion to the intended depth to which the screw is to be driven.
dimension of the washer diameter or side length. The
The screscrew w shal
shalll not
not be hamm
hammer ered
ed into
into plac
placee but
but
TABLE 4.12 turned
turned with with a hand
hand operat
operated
ed or machi
machine ne opera
operated
ted
MINIMUM REQUIRED SIZE OF WASHERS wrench.
FOR STRUCTURAL BOLTED JOINTS (e) Timber
Timber thicknes
thicknesses
ses and screw
screw length
lengthss as shown
shown in
Figure 4.2(a) shall be such that—
Washer size, mm
Minimum Minimum side
(i) thickn
thicknessess of
of first
first membe
member, r, t 1 > 3 D;
Bolt (ii)
(ii) depth
depth of penetr
penetrati
ation
on into
into secon
second d member
member,, for
Thickness diameter for length for
round washers square washers species
species groups
groups —
M6 1.6 30 25 J1, JD1, J2, JD2, JD3 - t p > 7 D,
M8 2.0 36 32 J3, JD4 - t p > 8 D,
M10 2.5 45 40 J4, JD5 - t p > 10 D,
M12 3.0 55 50 J5, J6, JD6 - t p > 12 D.
M16 4.0 65 57
M20 5.0 72 65 For lesser
lesser values
values of t p, the
the basi
basicc load
load shal
shalll be
reduced in proportion to the decrease in t p and the
>M 20 6.0 85 75
coach screw shall be considered as non-loadbearing
non-loadbearing
4.4.3 Axial loads. Where
Where bolts
bolts are loaded
loaded axiall
axially,
y, the
the if t p is less than 4 D.
basic working load of the bolt shall be taken as the lesser 4.5.3 Withdrawal loads.
of the axial strength of the bolt and the bearing strength 4.5.3.1 Basic working loads. The basic working loads for
of the timber under the washer when loaded perpendicular coach screws in withdrawal
withdrawal from the side grain are given given
to the grain. The design axial strength of bolts and the in Table 4.14. Basic working loads for coach screws fixed
effect
effective
ive diamet
diameter
er for
for use in compu
computin
ting
g the bearin
bearingg into end grain shall not exceed 60 percent of the values
pressure on the timber are given in Table 4.13. given in Table 4.14.
TABLE 4.13 4.5.3.2 Permissibl
Permissiblee loads. The permissib
permissible le withdraw
withdrawal al
DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR BOLTS UNDER load Q for a coach screw in withdrawal shall be taken to
AXIAL LOAD be given by—
Axial strength Effective diameter of a Q = k13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.
(4.9)
Bolt size of bolt* standard washer† in bearing
kN mm but not greater than the value given in Table 4.1 4(C)
where
M6 4.0 16
M8 7.5 21 k 13 = 1.0 for coach
coach screscrews
ws in side
side grain
grain,,
M10 11.5 27 = 0.6
0.6 for
for coac
coach h scre
screwsws in endend gragrain
in
M12 17 31 = basi
basicc worki
working
ng loa
load
d for coac
coach
h screw
screwss in side
side
M16 32.0 31
grain, given in Tables 4.14(A) and 4.14(B).
M20 50.0 50
M24 72 60
M30 11 5 69
TABLE 4.14
M36 16 5 78 WITHDRAWAL LOADS FOR
* Bolts to
to be of grade 4.6, AS 1111.
COACH SCREWS IN SIDE GRAIN
† Standard
Standard washers are washers
washers having the minimum (Comprising
(Comprising Tables 4.14(A), 4.14(B) and 4.14(C))
4.14(C))
dimensions
dimensions shown in Table 4.12. The effective diameter
diameter is
less than the actual diameter
diameter because it includes
includes an allowance
allowance
4.14(A) UNSEASONED TIMBER
for bending of the washer. Basic working load, N per mm penetration of
Species thread
group
4.5 COACH SCREWS. Shank diameter, mm
6 8 10 12 16 20
4.5.1 General.
General. The
The basic
basic worki
working
ng loads
loads given
given in the
the
J1 77 87 98 108 12 5 140
following clauses are applicable to steel coach screws as J2 61 69 79 87 10 0 113
specified in AS 1393. J3 43 51 58 64 74 84
4.5.2 Lateral loads. For coach screws bearing laterally in J4 34 36 40 43 51 58
unseasoned timber, the provisions of Clause 4.4 for bolts J5 26 27 30 35 40 43
shall apply, subject to the following conditions: J6 20 20 22 25 30 33
(a) For the purpos

purposee of Clause 4.4,
4.4, a coach screw shall
shall be
considered to be a bolt of diameter equal to the shank 4.14(B) SEASONED TIMBER
diameter of the screw. Basic working load, N per mm penetration of
Species thread
(b) The screws shall
shall be fitted with washers
washers as specified
specified group
in Clause 4.4.2.6. Shank diameter, mm
(c) In a two-member
two-member joint, thethe thinner
thinner member shall
shall have 6 8 10 12 16 20
a mini
minimumum
m thic
thickn
knes
esss of thre
threee time
timess the
the shan
shank
k JD1 96 109 12 0 135 156 17 5
diameter of the coach screw. JD2 76 86 99 109 125 14 1
JD3 54 63 73 80 93 10 6
(d) The diamet
diameter
er of the hole for the shank
shank shall
shall be not
JD4 43 45 50 54 64 72
less than the shank diameter of the screw nor exceed JD5 32 34 38 44 50 54
it by more
more than
than 1 mm or 10 perc percen
entt of the shan
shank
k JD6 25 25 28 31 38 41
COPYRIGHT
37 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 4.14(C) = factor

factor for tensio
tensionn loads applied
applied along
along the
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WITHDRAWAL grain, given in Table 4.17
LOAD PER COACH SCREW (Values
(Values of k 18 for intermediat
intermediatee directions
directions
Nominal diameter of coach Maximum permissible
permissible may be obtained by the use of Hankinson’s
screw withdrawal load formula, see Clause 4.4.2.3.)
mm N
= basic
basic load
load given in Table
Table 4.15.
4.15.
6 2 000
8 4 000 4.6.4 Spacings,
Spacings, edge and end distances.
distances. Table
Table 4.18
4.18
10 6 000 provides
provides recommende
recommended d minimum
minimum values
values of spacings,
spacings,
12 9 000 edge and end distances
distances which are defined
defined and illustrated
illustrated
16 20 000 in Figure 4.8.
20 31 500
4.6 SPLIT-RING CONNECTORS. 4.7 SHEAR PLATE CONNECTORS.

4.6.1 General.
General. The followi
following
ng requir
requireme
ements
nts relate
relate to 4.7.1 General.
General. The follow
following
ing require
requiremen
ments
ts relate
relate to
spli
split-
t-ri
ring
ng conn
connec
ecto
tors
rs of nomi
nomina
nall size
size 64 mm and and shear plate connectors of nominal 67 mm and 102 mm
102 mm. size.
An M12
M12 bolt
bolt is used
used in conj
conjun
unct
ctio
ion
n with
with the
the 64 mm An M20
M20 bolt
bolt is used
used in conj
conjun
unct
ctio
ion
n with
with a 67 mm
connec
connector
tor and an M20 boltbolt is used
used with the 102 mm connector and an M24 bolt with a 102 mm connector.
connector. The bolts are fitted with washers as given in Where required, bolts are fitted with washers as specified
Clause 4.4.2.6. in Clause 4.4.2.6.
NOTE: In computations for the design of the timber members, the NOTE: In computations for the design of the timber members, the
projected area of the groove to receive the connector in one member projected area of the groove in the timber to receive the connector
may be taken as 710 mm2 for the 64 mm connector and 1450 mm2 may be taken as 632 mm2 for the 67 mm connector and 1600 mm2
for the 102 mm connector. for the 102 mm connector.
4.6.2 Basic loads. The basic working loads for joints in 4.7.
4.7.2
2 Basi
Basicc load
loads.
s. The
The basi
basicc work
workin
ing
g load
loadss for
for
unseasoned timber are given in Table 4.15. These loads shear-plate connectors in unseasoned timber are given in
apply to a connector unit comprising one split-ring in the Table 4.19. These basic loads apply to a connector unit
contact faces of a timber-to-timber joint with its bolt in comp
compririsi
sing
ng one
one shea
shear-p
r-pla
late
te in the
the cont
contac
actt face
face of a
single shear. timber-to-steel joint with its bolt in single shear.
4.6.3 Permissible loads. The permissible load Q for a 4.7.3 Permissible loads. The permissible load Q for a
split-ring
split-ring connector
connector shall be taken to be given by — shear-plate
shear-plate connector
connector shall be the lesser
lesser of —
Q = k1 k15 k17 k18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.1
(4.10)
0) Q = 24 000 N
or
where
Q = k1 k15 k17 k18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.1
(4.11)
1)
k 1 = factor for duratiotion of loaload given in
Table 2.5 where k 1, k 15, k 17, and k 18 are as defined in Clause 4.6.3
k 15 = 1.0 for unseas
unseasoned
oned timber
timber and
and is the
the basi
basicc loa
load
d giv
given
en in Tabl
Tablee 4.1
4.19.
9.
= fact
factor
or for
for seas
season
oned
ed timb
timbeer give
givenn in NOTE
NOTE:: Load
Loadss marke
marked d with
with an aste
asteri
risk
sk in Tabl
Tablee 4.19
4.19 excee
exceed
d
Table 4.16 24 000 N but are included for interpolation purposes.
k 17 = factor for multiple
multiple connect
connector
or joints given
given in 4.7.4 Spacings,
Spacings, edge and end distances.
distances. Table
Table 4.18
4.18
Table 4.11 provides
provides recommende
recommended d minimum
minimum values
values of spacings,
spacings,
k 18 = 1.0 for loads applied
applied in compression
compression along
along edge and end distances
distances which are defined
defined and illustrated
illustrated
the grain, and for loads applied in Figure 4.8.
perpendicular to the grain
LEGEND:
a1 = sp
spacing parallel to grain a3 = end distance
distance
a2 = spac
spacin
ing
g perp
perpen
endidicu
cula
larr to grai
grain
n a4 = edge distance
distance
FIGURE
FIGURE 4.8. SPACING,
SPACING, EDGE AND END DISTANCES
DISTANCES FOR SPLIT-RING
SPLIT-RING AND SHEAR-PLATE
SHEAR-PLATE CONNECTORS
CONNECTORS
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 38
TABLE
TABLE 4.15
BASIC WORKING LOADS FOR A SINGLE SPLIT-RING CONNECTOR IN UNSEASONED TIMBER
Minimum nominal thickness
Basic working load per connector in single shear, N
Internal of timber, mm
Joint group diameter of Connectors Angle of load to grain
ring mm Connectors in
opposite in
one side only 0° 15° 30° 45° 60° 75° 90°
two sides
J1 64 — 38 11900 11300 9880 8440 7370 6740 6540
25 50 17890 16900 14800 12600 11000 11000 9790
102 — 50 22900 22200 20600 18700 17100 16100 15800
38 75 31200 30300 28000 25400 23200 21800 21400
J2 64 — 38 9520 9000 7780 6580 5700 5190 5030
25 50 14200 13400 11600 9870 8560 7800 7560
102 — 50 19700 18800 16900 14700 13100 12100 11800
38 75 26700 25500 22900 20000 17800 16500 16600
J3 64 — 38 8900 8260 6910 5650 4780 4290 4140
25 50 13400 12400 10400 8500 7190 6450 6230
102 — 50 18000 16900 14300 11900 10200 9210 8900
38 75 23000 21670 18710 15770 13630 12400 12000
J4 64 25 38 6360 6180 5760 5260 4850 4580 4500
— 50 8720 8500 7920 7230 6660 6300 6180
38 64 9520 9260 9630 7920 6300 6900 6760
102 — 50 13900 13210 11630 9990 8760 8040 7800
38 — 14900 14400 13400 12200 11200 10500 10300
50 75 18400 17570 15650 13610 12040 11110 10800
J5 64 25 38 5100 4810 4170 3530 3060 2790 2700
— 50 7400 7020 6160 5280 4610 4230 4100
38 64 7620 6420 6910 6320 5820 5510 5400
102 — 50 11000 10480 9270 8010 7050 6490 6300
38 — 11900 11560 10710 9740 8930 8410 8240
50 75 13600 13120 11940 10690 9650 9010 8800
J6 64 25 38 4100 3880 3370 2860 2490 2270 2200
— 50 6000 5710 5040 4340 3810 3500 3400
38 64 6100 5930 5520 5040 4640 4390 4300
102 — 50 9200 8730 7660 6560 5740 5260 5100
38 — 9500 9230 8560 7790 7150 6740 6600
50 75 11000 10610 9670 8630 7790 7270 7100
TABLE
TABLE 4.16
FACTOR k15 FOR SPLIT-RING CONNECTORS IN SEASONED TIMBER
JD4,
Species group JD1, JD2, JD3 JD5,
JD6
Angle of load to grain 0° 15° 30° 45° 60° 75° 90° any
Factor k 15 1. 2 5 1.29 1.33 1. 3 8 1.42 1.46 1 .5 0 1.25
TABLE
TABLE 4.17
FACTOR k18 FOR TENSION LOADS ON SPLIT RINGS AND SHEAR PLATES
Factor k18
Size of split ring or shear
Connector remote from Connector at ends of members
plate mm
ends of members* Seas
Season
oned
ed timb
timber
er Unse
Unseas
ason
oned
ed timb
timber
er†
†
64, 67 1.0 1.0 0.5
102 0.8 0.6 0.3
* A connector
connector may be taken to occur in the middle
middle of a member if the distance
distance from the connector
connector to the
10 D,, where D is the connector diameter.
end of the timber is greater than 10 D
† Factors
Factors for seasoned timber
timber may be used if the timber
timber has negligible tendency
tendency to split (see Clause
Clause 4.1.4).
COPYRIGHT
39 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE
TABLE 4.18
MINIMUM SPACINGS, EDGE AND END DISTANCES FOR SPLIT RINGS
AND SHEAR PLATE CONNECTORS
Minimum distance
Spacing type mm
D = 64 mm and 67 mm D = 102 mm
End distance:
tension members 150 180
compression members 100 140
Edge distance:
0° to 30° angle of load to grain 45 70
30° to 90° angle of load to grain:
compression side 70 95
opposite
opposite compression
compression side 45 70
Between fasteners:
Spacing parallel to grain 180 230
spacing
spacing perpendicular
perpendicular to grain 90 140
spacing parallel to grain 90 140
spacing
spacing perpendicular
perpendicular to grain 115 165
TABLE
TABLE 4.19
BASIC WORKING LOADS FOR A SINGLE SHEAR PLATE CONNECTOR IN
UNSEASONED TIMBER
Minimum nominal
External Basic working load per connector unit and bolt in single shear, N
thickness
thickness of timber,
timber, mm
diameter of Bolt
Joint group Connectors Connectors Angle of load to grain
shear plate diameter
mm in one side opposite in
only two sides 0° 15° 30° 45° 60° 75° 90°
J1 67 M20 38 50 14200 13400 11700 10100 8810 8050 7830
102 M24 — 50 22900 22200 20500 18700 17100 16000 15800
50 75 31100* 30300* 27900* 25400* 23100 21800 21400
J2 67 M20 38 50 11400 10900 9340 7920 6850 6320 6050
102 M24 — 50 19700 18800 16900 14700 13100 12100 11800
50 75 26700* 25500* 22900 20000 17800 16500 16000
J3 67 M20 38 50 10700 9930 8320 6760 5720 5160 4980
102 M24 — 50 18000 16900 14300 11900 10100 9210 8900
50 75 24500* 23000 19500 16100 13700 12400 12000
J4 67 M20 38 50 8700 8070 6720 5480 4620 4150 4000
102 M24 — 50 10700 10400 9660 8810 8100 7610 7470
50 75 14200 13800 12800 11700 10700 10100 9920
J5 67 M20 38 50 6000 5670 4920 4170 3620 3300 3200
102 M24 — 50 9600 9270 8490 7610 6890 6450 6300
50 75 13000 12540 11430 10210 9210 8600 8400
J6 67 M20 38 50 4900 4630 4010 3400 2950 2680 2600
102 M24 — 50 7800 7530 6890 6170 5580 5220 5100
50 75 10500 10120 9200 8180 7370 6870 6700
* See Clause 4.7.3.
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 40
SECTION
SECTION 5. PLYWOOD
PLYWOOD
5.1 GENERA
GENERAL. L. Permis
Permissib
sible
le stress
stresses
es for struct
structura
urall exceed 15 percent, then the basic working stresses shall
plyw
plywoo
ood
d shal
shalll be obta
obtain
ined
ed by modimodifyfyin
ing
g the
the basi
basicc be modified by linear interpolatio
interpolation
n between
between those for 15
workin
workingg stress
stresses
es by factor
factorss approp
appropria
riate
te to the servic
servicee perc
percen
entt mois
moistu
ture
re cont
conten
entt and
and thos
thosee for
for 25 perc
percen
entt
conditions. Provision is made in this Standard only for moistu
moisturere conten
content,
t, obtain
obtained
ed by multip
multiplyi
lying
ng the basic
basic
plyw
plywoo
ood
d whic
which h has
has been
been stre
stress
ss grad
graded
ed by visu
visual
al or working stresses in Table 5.1 by the moisture content
mech
mechan
anic
ical
al mean
meanss to AS 2269 2269.W.Whe
here
re plyw
plywooood
d is factor k 19 given in Table 5.2(A). Similarly the stiffness
expose
exposedd to water
water or to damp
damp condit
condition
ionss such
such that
that its should
should be modified
modified by use of the moisture content
content factor
moisture content may exceed 20 percent for prolonged j6 given in Table 5.2(B).
periods, only plywood with a Type A bond as defined in 5.4.3 Temperature. The provisions of Clause 2.5.3 for
AS 2754.1 shall be used. seas
season
oned
ed timb
timber
er shal
shalll appl
apply
y in a simi
simila
larr mann
mannerer to
5 .2
.2 B ASI C WOR KIN G ST RE RE SS
SS E S A N D structural plywood.
STIFFNESS. The basic working stresses and moduli of 5.4.4 Plywood assembly
assembly factor.
factor. The values
values shown
shown in
elasticity and rigidity for structural plywood are given in Table 5.1 refer to basic properties of plywood veneer in
Table 5.1 for the various stress grades. the direction of the grain. In order to use these values to
5.3 DESIGN. derive
derive the properties of plywood
plywood formed from several
5.3.1 Permissib
Permissible le stresses.
stresses. Permis
Permissib
sible
le stress
stresses
es for layers of veneer, the basic working stress and stiffness
structural plywood shall be obtained by multiplying the appropriate to a particular property shall be modified in
basi
basicc work
workin
ing
g stre
stress
sses
es give
given
n in Clau
Clause
se 5.2
5.2 by the
the accord
accordanc
ancee with
with the assemb
assembly ly factor
factor given
given in Tables
Tables
modification factors given in Clause 5.4, as appropriate 5.3(A) and 5.3(B) applicable to the relative direction of
to the
the serv
servic
icee cond
condititio
ions
ns and
and the
the asse
assemb
mbly
ly of the
the stress in the plywood and the direction of grain in its
plywood. face plies.
NOTE: The simplified methods of calculations
calculations shown in Tables
5.3.2 Deflections. Deflection calculations shall take into 5.3(A)
5.3(A) and 5.3(B)
5.3(B) must be modifie
modified
d as shown in Appendi
Appendixx E for
account the modification factors in Clause 2.5.1.2. structures so proportioned that the strength of plywood is reduced
due to buckling distortions.
5.4 MODIFICATION FACTORS.
5.4.1 Duration
Duration of load. The multiplying
multiplying factors
factors k 1, j2 5.4.5 Stability
Stability factors.
factors. Stabil
Stability
ity factor
factorss for plywoo
plywood
d
and j3 give
given n in Clau
Clause
se 2.5.
2.5.1
1 shou
should
ld be used
used wher
wheree diaphragms are given in Appendix E.
appropriate. 5.5
5.5 JOIN
JOINTS
TS.5.5.5
.5.1
.1 Nail
Nailed
ed and
and scre
screwe
wedd join
joints
ts..
5.4.2 Moisture
Moisture condition
condition.. For plywood at a moisture Recommenda
Recommendations
tions for the design
design strength
strength and stiffness
stiffness of
content of 15 percent or less, the basic working stresses nailed
nailed and screwe
screwed d joints
joints betwee
between n plywoo
plywood d and solid
solid
shall
shall be taken
taken in accord
accordanc
ancee with
with Table
Table 5.1.
5.1. Where
Where timber are given in Appendix D.
plywood is liable to be subjected to conditions such that 5.5.2 Glued joints. For information on glued joints see
the average moisture content for a 12 month period will Table 5.3(B) and Clause 4.1.1.
TABLE 5.1
BASIC WORKING STRESSES AND STIFFNESS FOR STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD
(Moisture content 15% or less)
Compression in Compression
Short duration Short duration
Bending Tension Shear the plane of the normal to the modulus of modulus or
Stress grade sheet plane of sheet
elasticity MPa rigidity MPa
( E) (G)
F34 34.5 20.7 2.30 25.9 10.4 21 500 1 075

F27 27.5 16.5 2.30 20.6 9.0 18 500 925
F22 22.0 13.2 2.30 16.5 7.8 16 000 800
F17 17.0 10.2 2.30 12.8 6.6 14 000 700
F14 14.0 8.4 2.05 10.5 5.2 12 000 625
F11 11.0 6.6 1.80 8.3 4.1 10 500 525
F8 8.6 5.2 1.60 6.5 3.3 9 100 455
F7 6.9 4.1 1.40 5.2 2.6 7 900 395
TABLE 5.2
FACTORS FOR SOAKED PLYWOOD WITH MOISTURE CONTENT 25% OR GREATER
(comprisin
(comprising
g Tables
Tables 5.2(A)
5.2(A) and 5.2(B))
5.2(B))
5.2(A) STRENGTH FACTOR k 19 5.2(B) STIFFNESS FACTOR j 6
Factor Ty pe of st if f ne ss Fa c to r j6
Type of stress
k 19
Modulus of elasticity 0.8
Bending 0.6 Modulus of rigidity
rigidity 0.6
Tension in plane of sheet 0.7
Shear 0.6
Compression
Compression in plane of sheet 0.4
Compression
Compression normal to plane of sheet 0.45
COPYRIGHT
41 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE 5.3
ASSEMBLY FACTORS FOR PLYWOOD
(Comprisin
(Comprising
g Tables
Tables 5.3(A) and 5.3(B))
5.3(B))
5.3(A) GENERAL
Assembly factor
Stress direction with
Property respect to grain Portion
Portion of cross-secti
cross-section
on to be considered
considered in
direction in face plies computing area or second moment of area Modificati
Modification
on of basic values
values in Table
Table 5.1
(moment of inertia)
Tension Parallel or Parallel plies * only Basic stress for tension parallel to grain
perpendicular
±45° Full cross-sectional area 0.17 × basic working stress for tension parallel
to grain
Com pr
pression † Parallel or Parallel plies * only Basic stress in compression parallel to grain
perpendicular
±45° Full cross-sectional area 0.34 × basic working stress
stress in compression
compression
parallel to grain
Deformation
Deformation in Parallel or Parallel plies *only Basic value for modulus of elasticity
compression
compression or tension
tension perpendicular
± 45° Full cross-sectional area 0.17 × basic value for modulus of elasticity
Shear through Parallel or Full cross-sectional area Basic working shear stress
thickness perpendicular
±45° Full cross-sectional area 1.5 × basic working shear stress
Compression — Full loaded area Basic working stress in compression
perpendicular
perpendicular to face perpendicular
of plywood
Strength in bending‡ Parallel or The basic working bending moment capacity Basic working stress for extreme fibre in
(perpendicula
(perpendicularr to plane perpendicular bending
of plies) shall be computed from:
where
g19 = 1.20 for three-ply plywood having the
grain of the outer plies perpendicular to the span
and
g19 = 1.00 for all other plywood
= basic working stress for extreme fibre in

bending
I = second moment of area (moment of inertia)
computed on basis of parallel plies only
Y max = distance from neutral axis to outer fibre
of outermost ply having its grain in the direction
of the span
Deflec
Deflectio
tion
n in bending
bending Parall
Parallel
el or Deflection may be calculated by the usual Basic value for modulus of elasticity
perpendicular formula, taking as the second moment of area
(moment of inertia) that of the parallel plies +
0.03 times that of the perpendicular plies
Shear deformation in Parallel or Full cross-sectional area Basic value for modulus of rigidity
plane of sheet perpendicular
Shear deformation Parallel or Full cross-sectional area Basic value for modulus of rigidity
through the thickness
thickness perpendicular
* By ‘parallel
‘parallel plies’
plies’ is meant those
those plies
plies whose grain
grain direction
direction is parallel
parallel to the
the direction
direction of principal
principal stress.
stress.
† The effec
effectt of bucklin
buckling g on compress
compression
ion streng
strength
th is given
given in appendi
appendixx E.
‡ For bending
bending in the plane
plane of the plies,
plies, check the in-plane
in-plane compressio
compressionn and tension
tension stresses.
stresses. The effect
effect of buckling
buckling on the compression
compression
strength is given in appendix E.
COPYRIGHT
AS 1720.1—1988 42
TABLE 5.3 ( continued )

5.3(B) SHEAR
SHEAR IN PLANES
PLANES OF PLIES
PLIES
Stress direction with Assembly factor

Type of construction Position of shear respect to grain direction in Modification of basic values in Table
face plies Area to be considered
5.1
Plywood beams Longitudinal shear between plies Parallel or perpendicular Full shear area 0.4 × basic shear stress
Box beams and I-beams with plywood Shear between plies of web or between web Parall
Parallel
el or perpend
perpendicu
icular
lar Full
Full area
area of contact
contact betwee
between
n 0.2 × basic shear stress
webs and flange plywood and flange
±45° Full area of contact between 0.2 × basic shear stress

plywood and flange
Panels with plywood covers stressed in Shear between plies or between cover and Parall
Parallel
el or perpend
perpendicu
icular
lar Full
Full area
area of contact
contact betwee
between
n 0.4 × basic shear stress for interior
compression or tension or both framing members when: (a) depth of plywood and members framing
member exceeds twice its width and end
nogging is used, or (b) depth of member is 0.2 × basic shear stress for edge framing
not more than twice its width and no end members
nogging is used ±45° Full area of contact between 0.4 × basic shear stress for interior
plywood and framing member framing
framing member
0.2 × basic shear stress for edge framing
members
COPYRIGHT
43 AS 1720.1—1988
SECTIO
SECTION
N 6. ROUND
ROUND TIMBER
TIMBERS
S
6.1 GENERAL.
GENERAL. Whether
Whether naturally round timbers are 6.4 ADDITIONAL MODIFICATION FACTORS.
used as simple structural members, i.e. as poles or piles 6.4.1 Factor for immaturit
immaturity. y. For poles
poles having
having mid-
mid-
or as elem
elemen
ents
ts of a comp
compososit
itee stru
struct
cture
ure,, the
the desi
design
gn length diameters less than 250 mm, due allowance must
procedures shall be similar to those given in Section 3, be made
made for
for the
the prop
proper
erti
ties
es of imma
immatuture
re timb
timber
er.. For
For
subject to the provisions of Clauses 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4. eucalyptus species and radiata pine, this may be done
6 .2
SS E S A N D through multiplication of basic stresses and modulus of
STIFFNESS. The basic working stresses and stiffness elasticity by the factors k 20 and j9 respectively given in
for untrimmed logs, poles or piles conforming in quality Table 6.2.
to the requirements of AS 2209 shall be those given in NOTE
NOTE:: For
For spec
specie
iess othe
otherr than
than euca
eucaly
lypt
ptus
us or radi
radiat
ataa pine,
pine,
Tabl
Tables
es 2.3
2.3 and
and 2.4.
2.4. For
For any
any part
partic
icul
ular
ar spec
specie
ies,
s, the
the conservative
conservative assumptions
assumptions should be used in design unless special
approp
appropria
riate
te stress
stress grade
grade is derive
derivedd from
from its streng
strength
th investigations have been undertaken to derive accurate values.
groups as given in Table 6.1. 6.4.2 Shaving factor.
factor. For timber
timber member
memberss in natura
naturall
TABLE 6.1 pole form, the basic working stresses
stresses shall be reduced if
the poles
poles have
have been
been shaved
shaved.. For poles
poles of eucaly
eucalyptu
ptuss
CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN STRENGTH spec
specie
iess and
and radi
radiat
ataa pine
pine that
that have
have been
been shav
shaved
ed to a
GROUP AND STRESS GRADE FOR ROUND smooth cylindrical form, the shaving factor k 21 shall be
TIMBERS GRADED TO AS 2209 taken as specified in Table 6.3. In addition, it shall be
St r e n g t h g r o u p St r e s s g r a d e assumed that the effect of shaving will be to reduce the
S1 F34 modulus of elasticity by 5 percent.
S2 F27
S3 F22 6.5 DESIGN DETAILS.
S4 F17
S5 F14 6.5.1
6.5.1 Effect
Effective
ive pole
pole cross-
cross-sec
sectio
tion.
n. The
The effe
effect
ctiv
ivee
S6 F11 diameter of a cross-section between two points of lateral
S7 F8 restraint shall be taken as the mean of the diameters at
the points of lateral restraint.
NOTE: The equivalence expressed in Table 6.1 is based on the
assumpt
assumption
ion that all poles
poles or logs
logs are cut from mature trees.
trees. 6.5.2
6.5.2 Effect
Effective
ive cross-
cross-sec
sectio
tion
n of untre
untreate
ated
d timber
timber..
Factors
Factors for immaturity
immaturity are given in Clause 6.4.1.
6.4.1. Unless
Unless subjected
subjected to adequate
adequate preservative
preservative treatment
treatment in
accordance with an approved Standard, the sapwood of
6.3 DESIGN. all timbers shall be disregarded in assessing the effective
43 AS 1720.1—1988
SECTIO
SECTION
N 6. ROUND
ROUND TIMBER
TIMBERS
S
6.1 GENERAL.
GENERAL. Whether
Whether naturally round timbers are 6.4 ADDITIONAL MODIFICATION FACTORS.
used as simple structural members, i.e. as poles or piles 6.4.1 Factor for immaturit
immaturity. y. For poles
poles having
having mid-
mid-
or as elem
elemen
ents
ts of a comp
compososit
itee stru
struct
cture
ure,, the
the desi
design
gn length diameters less than 250 mm, due allowance must
procedures shall be similar to those given in Section 3, be made
made for
for the
the prop
proper
erti
ties
es of imma
immatuture
re timb
timber
er.. For
For
subject to the provisions of Clauses 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4. eucalyptus species and radiata pine, this may be done
6 .2
SS E S A N D through multiplication of basic stresses and modulus of
STIFFNESS. The basic working stresses and stiffness elasticity by the factors k 20 and j9 respectively given in
for untrimmed logs, poles or piles conforming in quality Table 6.2.
to the requirements of AS 2209 shall be those given in NOTE
NOTE:: For
For spec
specie
iess othe
otherr than
than euca
eucaly
lypt
ptus
us or radi
radiat
ataa pine,
pine,
Tabl
Tables
es 2.3
2.3 and
and 2.4.
2.4. For
For any
any part
partic
icul
ular
ar spec
specie
ies,
s, the
the conservative
conservative assumptions
assumptions should be used in design unless special
approp
appropria
riate
te stress
stress grade
grade is derive
derivedd from
from its streng
strength
th investigations have been undertaken to derive accurate values.
groups as given in Table 6.1. 6.4.2 Shaving factor.
factor. For timber
timber member
memberss in natura
naturall
TABLE 6.1 pole form, the basic working stresses
stresses shall be reduced if
the poles
poles have
have been
been shaved
shaved.. For poles
poles of eucaly
eucalyptu
ptuss
CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN STRENGTH spec
specie
iess and
and radi
radiat
ataa pine
pine that
that have
have been
been shav
shaved
ed to a
GROUP AND STRESS GRADE FOR ROUND smooth cylindrical form, the shaving factor k 21 shall be
TIMBERS GRADED TO AS 2209 taken as specified in Table 6.3. In addition, it shall be
St r e n g t h g r o u p St r e s s g r a d e assumed that the effect of shaving will be to reduce the
S1 F34 modulus of elasticity by 5 percent.
S2 F27
S3 F22 6.5 DESIGN DETAILS.
S4 F17
S5 F14 6.5.1
6.5.1 Effect
Effective
ive pole
pole cross-
cross-sec
sectio
tion.
n. The
The effe
effect
ctiv
ivee
S6 F11 diameter of a cross-section between two points of lateral
S7 F8 restraint shall be taken as the mean of the diameters at
the points of lateral restraint.
NOTE: The equivalence expressed in Table 6.1 is based on the
assumpt
assumption
ion that all poles
poles or logs
logs are cut from mature trees.
trees. 6.5.2
6.5.2 Effect
Effective
ive cross-
cross-sec
sectio
tion
n of untre
untreate
ated
d timber
timber..
Factors
Factors for immaturity
immaturity are given in Clause 6.4.1.
6.4.1. Unless
Unless subjected
subjected to adequate
adequate preservative
preservative treatment
treatment in
accordance with an approved Standard, the sapwood of
6.3 DESIGN. all timbers shall be disregarded in assessing the effective
6.3.1 Permissib
Permissiblele stresses.
stresses.To
To obtain
obtain permis
permissib
sible
le stress
stresses
es stru
struct
ctur
ural
al cros
cross-
s-se
sect
ctio
ion
n of pole
poless at or abov
abovee the
the
for naturally round timbers, the basic working stresses ground-line where exposed to the weather or when used
shal
shalll be modi
modifi
fied
ed by such
such of the
the fact
factor
orss give
givenn in as piles above permanent water level.
Clause
Clause 2.5 as are applicable
applicable to the service conditions.
conditions. In 6.5.3 Moisture content of timbers in ground contact.
addition, the modification factors specified in Clause 6.4 Irrespective of whether poles are used in the unseasoned,
shall also be applied where appropriate. partially seasoned or fully seasoned condition, it shall be
6.3.2 Deflections. Deflection calculations shall take into assum
ssumeded tha
that all
all part
partss of pole
poless with
within
in 1 m of a
account the modification factors in Clause 2.5.1.2. ground
ground-lin
-linee contac
contactt are,
are, for design
design purpos
purposes,
es, in the
unseasoned condition.
6.5.4 Connectors. For informa
informatio
tion
n on connec
connector
torss see
Appendix
Appendix F.
TABLE 6.2
IMMATURITY FACTORS
6.2(A) IMMATURITY FACTOR k20 FOR STRESSES
Factor k20 for stresses
Species
D = 75 D = 100 D = 125 D = 150 D = 175 D = 200 D = 225 D = 250
Eucalyptus species 0.80 0.90 1.0 0 1.00 1 .0 0 1.00 1.00 1.0 0
Radiata pine 0.70 0.75 0 .8 0 0.85 0.9 0 0.95 1.00 1 .0 0
D = pole diameter at mid-length, mm.
6.2(B) IMMATURITY FACTOR j 9 FOR STIFFNESS
Factor k20 for stresses

Species
D = 75 D = 100 D = 125 D = 150 D = 175 D = 200 D = 225 D = 250
Eucalyptus species 0.80 0.90 1.0 0 1.00 1 .0 0 1.00 1.00 1.0 0
Radiata pine 0.70 0.75 0 .8 0 0.85 0.9 0 0.95 1.00 1 .0 0
D = pole diameter at mid-length, mm.

AS 1720.1—1988 44
TABLE 6.3
SHAVING FACTOR k21
SHAVING FACTOR
Factor k21
Stress
Eucalyptus Species Radiata pine
Bending 0 .8 5 0.75
Compression parallel to grain 0 .9 5 0.90
Compression perpendicular to grain and shear 1 .0 0 1.00
Tension 0 .8 5 0.75
45 AS 1720.1—1988
SECTION
SECTION 7. GLUED-LA
GLUED-LAMINA
MINATED
TED CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION
7.1 GENERA
GENERAL. L. This
This Sect
Sectio
ion
n shal
shalll be appl
applie
ied
d in increased by the appropriate factor k 23 given in Table 7.1.
conjunction with Sections 2 and 3. The provisions of this The value of nL, the effective number of laminations to
Sectio
Section
n apply
apply specif
specifica
ically
lly to glued-
glued-lam
lamina
inated
ted timber
timber be used in Table 7.1, may be taken to be 1.0, 0.5 and
members manufactured in accordance with AS 1328. 0.25
0.25 time
timess the
the numb
numberer of memb
member er lami
lamina
nati
tion
onss in
NOTE: The structural characteristics of laminated timber are very evaluating k 23 for application to the basic tension stress
similar
similar to those of solid timber. The laminating process does not of tension members, the compression stress of columns
affect the stiffness of the timber, but does provide a slight increase and
and the
the bend
bendining
g stre
stress
ss of beam
beamss resp
respec
ecti
tive
vely
ly.. In
in stre
strengt
ngth.
h. Desi
Design
gn proce
procedur
dures
es to acco
accoun
untt for
for the effe
effect
ctss of
evaluating k 23 for modifyi
modifying
ng the basic
basic shear
shear stress
stress of
butt-joints in the laminations are given in Paragraph G2, Appendix
G. Butt
Butt join
joints
ts are
are a sourc
sourcee of consi
consider
derab
able
le weak
weakne
ness
sses
es in beams, the effective number of elements for shear shall
glued-laminat
glued-laminateded timber and in general it is not economical
economical to design be taken as four or the number of laminations, whichever
members so that they contain butt joints in locations subjected to is the lesser.
high tension stresses.
If severa
severall lamina
laminated
ted member
memberss act together
together to form
form a
Wher
Wheree any
any glue
glued-l
d-lam
amininat
ated
ed memb
memberer is likel
likely
y to be parallel support system, then the effect of load sharing
exposed to water or to damp conditions, only a phenolic on bending and compression stresses may be obtained by
glue shall be used in its manufacture. taking the factor k 23 to be unity and making use of the
factor k 8 as indicated in Clause 2.5.5.2.
7.2 DESIGN.
For some timbers, such as radiata pine and Douglas fir,
7.2.1 Basic and permissible stresses. The basic stresses a specia
speciall lamina
laminatio
tion
n factor
factor k 30 may
may be usedsed as an
for
for stru
struct
ctur
ural
al timb
timber
er set
set out
out in Sect
Sectio
ion
n 2, and
and the
the altern
alternati
ative
ve to the factor
factor k 23 in Table
Table 7.1.
7.1. This factor,
factor,
permis
permissib
sible
le stress
stresses
es given
given in Sectio
Section
n 3 shall
shall apply
apply to together with the special conditions required for its use
glue
glued-
d-la
lami
minanate
ted
d timb
timber
er subj
subjec
ectt to the
the addi
additi
tion
onal
al is given in Appendix G.
requirements of Clauses 7.3 and 7.4.
factors k 23 and k 30 are applied
NOTE: The factors applied to the basic workin
workingg
7.2.2 Deflections. Deflection calculations shall take into stresses for solid timber and are intended to account for the effects
account the modification factors in Clause 2.5.1.2. of glue laminating. Hence they are not used when the basic working
stresses of glulam elements have been derived directly through the
testing of such glulam elements.
7.3 MODIFICATION FACTORS.
7.3.1 Moisture
Moisture condition
condition.. For glued-laminated
glued-laminated members, TABLE 7.1
Clause 2.5.2(c) shall be applied in deriving permissible PARALLEL SUPPORT FACTOR k 23
stresses.
Effective number of laminations Factor
7.3.2 Lamination effects. carrying common load ( nL) k 23
7.3.2.1 Vertically
Vertically laminated timber. For a member of
laminated timber. 1 1.00
rectan
rectangul
gular
ar cross-
cross-sec
sectio
tionn compri
comprised
sed of two or more more 2 1.14
3 1.20
lamina
laminatio
tions
ns secure
securely
ly fasten
fastened
ed togeth
together
er by gluing
gluing and
load
loaded
ed in a diredirect
ctio
ionn para
parall
llel
el to the
the plan
planee of thethe 4 1.24
5 1.26
glue-lines, the basic working stresses in bending, shear 6 1.28
and compression parallel to the grain may be increased
7 1.30
by the appropriate factor k 23 given in Table 7.1. In the 8 1.31
use of this Table, nL (the effective number of laminations 9 1.32
carry
carryin
ing
g a comm
common on load
load)) shal
shalll be take
takenn as the
the tota
totall 1 0 o r m o re 1 .3 3
number of laminations in the member for bending and
shear.
shear. For compression
compression parallel
parallel to the grain,
grain, the value of
nL shal
shalll be take
taken
n to be equa equall to the
the tota
totall numb
numberer of 7.4 OTHER REQUIREMENTS.
laminations for the case of buckling in the plane of the 7.4.1 General.
General. The requir
requireme
ements
nts of Clause
Clausess 7.4.2
7.4.2 to
laminations, and half of the total number of laminations 7.4.
7.4.7
7 appl
apply
y spec
specifi
ifica
call
lly
y to glue
glued-
d-la
lami
mina
nate
ted
d timb
timber
er
for
for the
the case
case of buck
buckli ling
ng norm
normal al to the
the plan
planee of the
the members. Most of the provisions given below are set out
laminations. in AS 1328 but are repeated here for the convenience of
If severa
severall lamina
laminated
ted members
members act together
together to form
form a the designer.
parallel support system, then the effect of load sharing 7.4.2 End joints in laminations.
on bending and compression stresses may be obtained by
taking the factor k 23 to be unity and making use of the 7.4.2.1 Butt joints. Clauses for the design strength of butt
factor k 8 as given in Clause 2.5.5.2. joints are given in Appendix G.
For some timbers, such as radiata pine, hoop pine and 7.4.2.2 Glued end joints. Glued end joints shall comply
Douglas fir, a special lamination factor k 30 may be used with
with the
the requ
requir
irem
emen
ents
ts of AS 1328
1328 with
with rega
regard
rd to
as an altern
alternati
ative
ve to the factor k 23 in Tabl
Tablee 7.1.
7.1. This
This streng
strength,
th, otherw
otherwise
ise they shall
shall be treate
treated
d as butt
butt joints
joints
factor, together with the special conditions required for with respect to spacing and design.
its use, is given in Appendix G.
7.3.2.2 Horizontally laminated timber . For a member of
rect
rectan
angu
gula
larr cros
cross-
s-se
sect
ctio
ion
n comp
compri
risi
sing
ng two
two or more
more
lamina
laminatio
tions
ns secure
securely
ly fasten
fastened
ed togeth
togetherer by gluing
gluing and
loaded in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the
gluelines, the basic stresses parallel to the grain may be
AS 1720.1—1988 46
7.4.2.3 Spacing of end joints. where

(a) See Appendix
Appendix G for spacing of butt joints.
joints. E i = modulu
moduluss of
of elas
elastic
ticity the ith lamination
ity of the
(b) For limitatio
limitations
ns on the spacing
spacing of finger
finger joints and bi = actu
actual
al widt
width
h of the i th lamination
of the
scarf joints, see AS 1328.
E o = modulus of elasticity of outermost
7.4.3 Edge joints in lamination
laminations.
s. A lamina
laminatio
tion
n may lamination
lamination in tension.
tension.
comprise two or more pieces of timber placed edge to The position of the neutral axis, the second moment of
edge, i.e. side by side. The gluing and spacing of edge
area
area (momen
(momentt of inerti
inertia)
a) and the sectio
section
n modulu
moduluss are
joints shall be in accordance with the requirements of
then
then calcul
calculate
ated
d in the usual way using the effectiv
effectivee
AS 1328.
widths
widths instea
insteadd of the actual
actual widths.
widths. In calcul
calculati
ating
ng the
7.4.4 Lamination thickness. For straight members the deflection and bending strength of a beam, the modulus
thickness of seasoned boards shall be 50 mm or less. For of elas
elasti
tici
city
ty and
and allo
allowa
wabl
blee bend
bendin
ing
g stre
stress
ss for
for the
the
curved members, the thickness of laminations shall be outermost
outermost lamination are used.
limi
limite
ted
d to 1/15
1/1500 of the
the radi
radius
us of curv
curvat
atur
uree of thethe
In calculating the allowable shear stress, or the deflection
member
members, s, unless
unless it can be demons
demonstra
trated
ted that a tighte
tighterr
due to shear,
shear, a transf
transform
ormati
ation
on procedu
procedure
re based
based on the
curve
curve can be fabric
fabricate
ated
d withou
withoutt advers
adversee effect
effectss to the
rela
relati
tive
ve modu
moduli
li of rigi
rigidi
dity
ty of the
the vari
variou
ouss grade
gradess of
timber. In all cases, the moisture content of the laminate
materi
material
al may be used wherewhere these
these values
values are known.
known.
shal
shalll be unif
unifor
orm
m and
and the
the seas
season
onin
ing
g defe
defect
ctss shal
shalll be
Howe
Howeve ver,
r, it is simp
simplelerr and
and safe
safe to use
use the
the actu
actual
al
negligible as specified in AS 1328.
cross-sectional dimensions and assume that all material
7.4.5 Combination of grades of timbers. Combination has the shear properties of the laminations of the lowest
of grades
grades of timber
timber within any member
member is practi
practicab
cable
le grade used.
where the material of higher grade is placed in the most
7.4.6 Combination of species. Laminations of different
highly stressed zones, lower grade material being placed
timber species may be combined within the same beam.
in the more lightly
lightly stressed
stressed zones.
zones. Even if all laminations
laminations
Calculations for estimating the strength and stiffness of
are
are nomi
nomina
nall
lly
y of the
the same
same grad
grade,
e, thos
thosee porti
portion
onss of
members with combined species shall be made using the
lamina
laminatio
tions
ns in tensio
tension
n zones
zones subjec
subjected
ted to maximu
maximum m
transformed area method as described in Clause 7.4.5.
stress
stress shall
shall be carefu
carefully
lly select
selected
ed to be of the highest
highest
quality available within that grade. 7.4.7 Curved and tapered members. Due account shall
be taken of secondary stresses and instabilities arising
The stiffness properties of a glued-laminated beam made
from any curvature and taper in glued-laminated timber
from material of different grades may be obtained by the
members.
method of transformed area. In this method, the effective
width of each lamination
lamination is given by — NOTE:
NOTE: The seconda
secondary
ry effect
effectss due to the camber of nominal
nominally
ly
straight beams may be ignored.
bi(eff) = bi × E i / E o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7.1
(7.1))
47 AS 1720.1—1988
APPENDIX A
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF TIMBER STRUCTURES AND
ELEMENTS
(This Appendix forms an integral part of this Standard)
A1 GENERAL.
A1.1 Limitations of acceptance testing. The methods of test given in this Appendix are
applicable
applicable to structures
structures or structural
structural elements
elements and are not appropriate
appropriate for the testing
testing of
structural models or the establishment of general design data for timber or connections.
Two types of load test are considered. One is a ‘proof’ load test which shall be applied to
every
every struct
structure
ure of a popula
populatio
tion
n of struct
structure
uress for them to be accept
accepted.
ed. The other
other is a
‘prototype’ load test which need be applied only to a portion of a population of structures
for all structures of that population to be accepted. It should be noted that to carry a given
load, a different structure will be necessary depending on whether the design is based on
proof testing,
testing, prototype
prototype testing or computation
computation.. Partly, this arises from the necessity
necessity to use
a load factor to provide for the effect of variability in structural strength. Design by proof
testing implies that every structure of a population is tested and design by computation is
usually based on the results of laboratory tests on large samples of structural elements,
typically
typically 100. Hence in general, acceptance
acceptance based on proof testing will lead to the smallest
smallest
overall load factor and that based on prototype testing of a few structural elements will lead
to the largest load factors.
It will be noted that where a structure
structure comprises
comprises several types of components
components,, the specified
specified
ratio between test loads and working loads can vary considerably from one component to
anot
anothe
her.
r. Sinc
Sincee the
the test
test load
load to be used
used is the
the larg
larges
estt one
one requ
requir
ired
ed,, it may
may be most
most
economical to subdivide a structure into various groups of components and to test each such
group individually. This may be effected by temporarily strengthening those parts of the
structures that are not under test. However, if such temporary strengthening is carried out,
care shall be taken to ensure that the components under test receive their correct loading,
and do not receive artificial restraints or other forms of strengthening that would not exist
in the real structure.
A1.2 Circumsta
Circumstances
nces requiring
requiring tests.
tests. Stru
Struct
ctur
ures
es or part
partss of stru
struct
ctur
ures
es desi
design
gned
ed in
accordance with this Standard are not required to be tested unless by agreement between the
parties concerned. Tests may be accepted as an alternative to calculation or may become
necessary
necessary in circumstanc
circumstances
es which include
include —
(a)
(a) wher
wheree a stru
struct
ctur
uree or part
part of a stru
struct
ctur
uree is not
not amen
amenab
able
le to suff
suffic
icie
ient
ntly
ly accu
accura
rate
te
calculation;
(b) where
where materials
materials or design
design methods
methods are used
used other
other than
than those
those for which there is a
relevant specification or code of practice;
(c) where
where there is doubt
doubt or disagr
disagreem
eement
ent as to whethe
whetherr the struct
structure
ure or some
some part
part of it
complies with design rules, or as to whether the quality of the materials used is to the
required Standard.
A1.3 Testing authority. The testing of a structure or element shall be designed, supervised
and certified
certified by an engine
engineer
er or other
other compet
competent
ent authority
authority to ensure
ensure that tests
tests are in
accordance
accordance with this Standard.
NOTE: An example
example of a competent authority
authority would be a laboratory
laboratory registered
registered with the National
National Association
Association
of Testing Authorities, Australia.
A1.4 Information required. A copy of the detailed drawings and the specification, together
with any other data or information that might be required for the purpose of the test, shall
be deposited with the testing authority before the tests are commenced.
A2 DEFINITIONS. For the purpose of this Appendix, the following definitions apply:
A2.1 Prototype testing-application
testing-application of test loads to a structure or element to ascertain the
structural characteristics of structures or elements which are nominally identical to the unit
or units tested.
A2.2 Proof testing
testing-appli
-applicat
cation
ion of test
test loads
loads to a struct
structure
ure or elemen
elementt to ascert
ascertain
ain the
structural characteristics of only that one unit under test.
AS 1720.1—1988 48
A3 METHOD OF TESTING.
A3.1 General. The method by which the loading should be applied to the unit to be tested,
and the positions at which deflections should be measured can only be decided with special
reference to the particular structure or element and to the particular loading conditions to
be investigated.
A3.2 Test load. The test load should be applied and resisted in a manner that reasonably
approximates the actual service conditions. Although in general both proof and prototype
testin
testing
g are most likely
likely to involv
involvee symmet
symmetricrical
al loadin
loading
g in a vertic
vertical
al plane,
plane, the engine
engineer
er
and/or the relevant
relevant approving authority (see Clause
Clause 1.8.1 ) may require, either additionally
additionally
or alternative
alternatively,
ly, asymmetric
asymmetric loading
loading of a structure
structure or element
element to simulate,
simulate, for example,
example, the
effect of wind loading. Lateral support to the unit as a whole or to individual members of
the unit shall also represent as closely as possible actual service conditions.
A3.3 Eccentric
Eccentricities
ities.. Any eccentrici
eccentricities
ties not inherent
inherent in the design
design of the structure
structure or element,
element,
or not resulting from typical loading in service, shall be avoided at points of loading and
reaction, and care shall also be taken to ensure that no inadvertent restraints are present.
Where it is clear that the method of test involves a significant or appreciable divergence
from servic
servicee conditi
conditions
ons,, either
either in loadin
loadingg or restra
restraint
int,, due allowa
allowance
nce shall
shall be made to
compen
compensat
satee for this.
this. All likely
likely combin
combinatiations
ons of perman
permanentent loads
loads and impose
imposed d loads
loads of
shorter duration, including those due to wind and, where applicable, those due to impact,
shall be taken into account when determining
determining the worst loading
loading conditions.
conditions. The latter shall
be converted in accordance with Paragraph A.4 or Paragraph A.5, as appropriate, into an
equivalent
equivalent test load.
A3.4 Load-deflection curve. A load-deflection curve shall be plotted during each test on
each unit. Such a curve will serve not only as a check against
against observationa
observationall errors, but also
to indicate any irregulariti
irregularities
es in the behaviour
behaviour under load of the structure or element and so
enable a particular weakness to be investigated as the test progresses. It is desirable that a
minimum of six points, not including the zero load point, be obtained to define the shape
of the load-deflection curve if the latter is predominantly linear, and a minimum of ten
points if the curve is significantly non-linear.
A4 PROOF TESTING.
A4.1 Equivalent test load. For the purpose
purpose of establishing
establishing an equivalenc
equivalencee between
between the
service loading for which the structure or element has been designed and the loading to be
applied for test purposes, the following procedure shall be adopted:
(a) For each element of a structure,
structure, ascertain
ascertain the critical
critical combination
combination of design
design loads from
either
either the engine
engineer
er respon
responsib
sible
le for the design
design or from
from the inform
informati
ation
on suppli
supplied
ed in
accordance
accordance with Paragraph
Paragraph A1.4.
(b) For each elemen
elementt of a struct
structure
ure,, calcul
calculate
ate the equiva
equivalen
lentt total test
test load
load ( ETL) which
includes any loading already on the structure before the test commences as follows:
ETL = (2.1k 26k 27 / k
k 1)[PD + 1.4(PL + Pw)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (A1)
where
PD = known permanen
permanentt load on the structure,
structure, such as its self-weight
self-weight
PL, PW = all other imposed
imposed loads
loads (for working stress
stress codes)
codes)
k 1 = the factor
factor from Table 2.5 appropriate
appropriate to the design
design load of shortest
shortest
duration included in the critical combination
k 26 = 1.00 for structural
structural elements
elements in which
which the effect of duration
duration of load on
strength is similar to that of simple beams. (Values of K 26 for some other special
special cases
cases are
given in Table A1.)
k 27 = factor
factor obtained from Table A2 to compensate
compensate for
for the fact that test load
is not of 15 min duration.
(c) Select
Select the largest
largest ETL thus obtained.
A4.2 Loading. The equivalent test load shall be applied to the unit at a rate as uniform as
is practicable. The ETL shall not remain on the unit for longer than 15 min before it is
removed. Should circumstances not permit the removal of the whole of the test load within
a reasonably short period, at least 25 percent of the ETL shall be removed within 15 min
subsequent to completion of the test, and 50 percent within the following hour.
49 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE A1
COMPENSATION FACTOR k26
Structural component Factor k26
Beams with slenderness coefficients greater than 10,
and all columns
columns — 1.1
timber initially
initially dry 1.4
timber initially green
Metal connectors
connectors —
failure in timber that is initially green 1.2
failure in timber that is initially dry 1.0
for failure of steel (k 1 / k
0.6 (k k 27)
TABLE A2
COMPENSATION FACTOR k27
Time to reach ETL 15 min 1h 6h
Factor k 27 for bending and tension strength

1.00 1.00 0 .9 5
Factor k 27 for compression strength, and for
strength of metal connectors 1.00 0.95 0. 9 0
A4.3 Acceptance for strength. At no stage shall the unit show any sign of distress, or
excessive distortion of any part or member. Furthermore, should the load-deflection curve
show any discontinuities or a considerable departure from linearity, the engineer and/or the
testing authority may require a repeat of the test to establish that no fault has developed in
the unit not detected in the first test.
A4.4 Acceptance of deflection. A check as to whether the deflection characteristics of a
structure are acceptable shall be made from the deflections measured for loads up to the
total design load. It should be noted that for long duration components of the load, the effect
of creep is to produce long-term deflections that are two and three times the short-term
deflections measured for structures made from timbers initially seasoned and unseasoned
respectively. (See Clause 2.5.1.2.)
Should the residual deflection on unloading the structure exceed 30 percent of the deflection
at ETL, the structur
structuree shall
shall not be accept
accepted
ed unless
unless the engine
engineer
er superv
supervisi
ising
ng the test is
satisfied that no serious permanent damage has been done to the structure. This may be
checked by reloading the structure again to the ETL.
A5 PROTOTYPE TESTING.
A5.1 General. For prototype testing, provisions of Paragraphs A5.2 to A5.8 shall apply in
addition to those specified in Paragraphs A1 and A3.
A5.2 Materials. The timber used in the prototype shall contain material only of the stress
grade which is being, or will be, used in manufacture. No material of a higher stress grade
shall be incorporated in the unit to be tested.
A5.3 Manufacture. The manufacture
manufacture and assembly
assembly of the prototype
prototype shall comply with the
design
design specif
specifica
icatio
tions,
ns, and the method
method of fabric
fabricati
ation
on used
used shall
shall simula
simulate,
te, as closel
closely
y as
possible, that which would be used in production.
A5.4 Equivalent test load. For the purpose of establishi establishing
ng an equivalence
equivalence between
between the
service loading for which the structure or element has been designed and the loading to be
applied for test purposes, the following procedure shall be adopted:
(a) For each element of a structure,
structure, ascertain
ascertain the critical combinatio
combination n of design
design loads from
either
either the engineer
engineer responsib
responsible le for the design
design or from
from the inform
informati ation
on suppli
supplieded in
accordance
accordance with Paragraph
Paragraph A1.4
(b) For each element of a structure,
structure, calculate
calculate the equivalent
equivalent test load ( ETL) as follows:
ETL = (2.2k 26k 27k 28 / k
k 1)(PD + PL + Pw) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (A2)
where
PD + PL + Pw = the critical critical combination
combination of dead,
dead, live and wind loads (for (for working
stress codes)
k 1 is the factor from Table 2.5 appropriate to the design load of shortest duration
included in the critical combination.
k 26, k 27 and k 28 are factors obtained from Tables A1, A2 and A3.
It should be noted that the factor k 28 depends on the number of units to be tested and
on the estima
estimated
ted coeffic
coefficienientt of variat
variation
ion of streng
strength
th for the total
total popula
populatiotionn from
whic
which h the
the test
test unit
unitss areare sele
select
cted
ed.. For
For guid
guidan
ance
ce to the
the engi
engineneer
er in maki
making ng an
assess
assessmenmentt of the coeffici
coefficient
ent of variat
variation
ion,, a likely
likely range
range of values
values is provid
provided ed in
Table A4.
AS 1720.1—1988 50
(c) Select
Select the largest
largest ETL thus obtained.
TABLE A3
SAMPLING FACTOR k28
Value of sampling factor k28 for estimated coefficient of
Number of similar units to be tested variation (percent) of strength of individual units of—
15 25 35
1 1.8 2.8 4.3

2 1.6 2.4 3.5
3 1.5 2.2 3.0
4 1.5 2.0 2.8

5 1.5 1.9 2.6
10 1.3 1.7 2.1
100 1.0 1.0 1.0
NOTE: For intermediate coefficients of variation, use linear interpolation on a log-log plot of coefficient of
variation against k 28.
TABLE A4
LIKELY VALUES OF COEFFICIENTS OF VARIATION
Likely
Likely range of coefficien
coefficients
ts of variation
variation of
Structural element
strength of individual unit, percent
Scantlings
bendign strength 25 to 40
tensile strength 30 to 50
compression
compression strength (as short column)
column) 15 to 25
Finger-jointed elements
bending strength 15 to 20
Connections
nailed joints 15
toothed plate and other mechanical fasteners 10 to 15
A5.5 Test procedure.

A5.5.1 Preloads. A load equal to the design load shall be applied to the unit, maintained
for 5 min and then removed. Deflections need not be measured during this preloading unless
specifically requested by the engineer. This load sequence is then repeated and during this
the maximum deflection,
deflection, residual deflection and any other deflections
deflections requested
requested by the
engineer shall be recorded.
A5.5.2 Test loading.
loading. Each prototype shall be loaded at a rate as uniform as practicable to
failure or the ETL, whichever occurs first.
A5.6 Acceptance of prototype.
A5.6.1 For strength. At no stage in its testing shall a unit have shown any failure of any
part or member up to a load equal to the ETL.
A5.6.2 For deflection. Each unit shall meet the requirements of Paragraph A4.4 and, in
addition, the residual deflection or deformation resulting from second preloading of any part
or member of the unit shall not exceed 5 percent of the acceptable deflection or deformation
under short-duration loading or such other limit as may be specified by the engineer or the
approving authority.
A5.6.3 Acceptance of production units . Production-run units similar in all respects to the
unit or units tested shall be deemed to be structurally acceptable if the results of the tested
unit or units comply fully with the requirements of Paragraph A5.6.2.
A6 REPORT OF TESTS. The report of the test on each unit, whether a proof test or
prototype test, shall contain in addition to the test results a clear statement of the conditions
of testing including the method of loading and of measuring deflection, together with any
other relevant data. The nature and size of defects in the timber, especially at the points of
failure, if any, and its moisture content should be recorded. The report should also contain
a statem
statement
ent as to whethe
whetherr or not the struct
structure
ure or part
part tested
tested satisfi
satisfies
es the accept
acceptanc
ancee
conditions.
51 AS 1720.1—1988
A7 USE OF TESTED STRUCTURES. Any unit tested in accordance with Paragraphs A4

or A5 and found to satisfy the standards of acceptability specified therein may only be
considered satisfactory for practical use as a structural unit subject to agreement between
the engineer, client and supplier.
NOTE: It should be realized the conformity with the acceptance requirements of Paragraphs A4 and A5 is a
necessary condition but may not be sufficient for total acceptability of a structure or element. The engineer
and/or approving
approving authority may require that other criteria apart from strength and stiffness
stiffness be satisfied
satisfied having
regard to the particular
particular service conditions
conditions of the structure
structure or element.
element. In deciding on the acceptability
acceptability of a
struct
structure
ure or elemen
elementt fabric
fabricate
ated
d of unseas
unseasone
oned
d timber
timber,, the engine
engineer
er and/or
and/or approvi
approving
ng authori
authority
ty should
should by
inspection
inspection or otherwise assess
assess the likelihood of any potential loss of strength
strength or serviceabili
serviceability
ty as a result of
members shrinking on drying, particular attention being paid to the effects of differential shrinkage and checking
or splitting of members at joints.
AS 1720.1—1988 52
APPENDIX B
BASIC DESIGN PROPERTIES OF STRUCTURAL TIMBER
Basic design properties and additional design information on roughly 40 species commonly
used in Australia will be given in Part 2 of this Standard.
NOTE: Design information,
information, including strength grouping, on hundreds
hundreds of other species
species from Australia
Australia and
overseas can be found in AS 2878 and the following publications:
BERNI, C., BOLZA, E. and CHRISTENSEN, F.J. South American timbers-the characteristics, properties and
uses of 190 species.
species. CSIRO Division of Building Research, Melbourne, 1979.
BOLZA, E. and KEATING, W. African timbers-the properties, uses and characteristics of 700 species.
CSIRO Division of Building Research, Melbourne, 1972.
BOLZA, E. and KLOOT, N.H. The mechanical

mechanical propertie
propertiess of 174 Australia
Australian Timbers. Technological Paper
n Timbers.
No 25, CSIRO Division of Forest Products, 1963.
KEATING,
KEATING, W.G. and BOLZA, E. Timbers Timbers of commerce, Vol. 1. South
South East Asia, Northern
Northern Australia
Australia and
Pacific. Incata Press, Melbourne, 1982.
53 AS 1720.1—1988
APPENDIX C
DESIGN OF BASIC STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
C1 SCOPE. This Appendix extends

extends the design
design recommendation
recommendationss given in Section
Section 3. It gives
accu
accura
rate
te value
valuess of the
the mate
materia
riall cons
consta
tant
nt refe
referr
rred
ed to in Clau
Clause
sess 3.2
3.2 and
and 3.3,
3.3, and provid
provides
es
information for the design of complex structural elements not adequately covered by Section 3.
C2 THE MATERIAL
MATERIAL CONSTANT
CONSTANT . The -fact
-factor
or may be obtain
obtained
ed from
from the
the foll
follow
owin
ing
g
equations:
For beams of seasoned timber
= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C1)
For beams of unseasoned timber
= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C2)
For columns of seasoned timber
= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C3)
For columns of unseasoned timber
= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C4)
wher
wheree deno
denote
tess the basi
basicc worki
working
ng str
stres
esss in ben
bendi
ding
ng and
and r = temporary
temporary load/total
load/total load. The
maximu
maximum m value
value of used
used need not
not exceed
exceed the valu
valuee compute
computedd for the case
case r = 0.25. In the case
of beams
beams where
where a temp
tempor
orar
ary
y load cause
causess a stress
stress rever
reversa
sal,
l, the value
value of to be used is that
that
corresponding to r = 1.0.
Values
Values of the material
material consta
constant
nt computed
computed from Equatio
Equations
ns C1-C4 are given
given in Tables
Tables C1-C4.
C1-C4.
TABLE C1
MATERIAL
MATERIAL CONSTANT
CONSTANT FOR BEAMS OF SEASONED
SEASONED TIMBER
TIMBER
Material constant
Stress grade
r = 0 r = 0.25 r = 0.50 r = 0.75 r = 1.0
F34 1.23 1.23 1.18 1.15 1.13
F27 1.18 1.18 1.13 1.10 1.08
F22 1.13 1.13 1.08 1.06 1.04
F17 1.08 1.08 1.03 1.01 0.99
F14 1.04 1.04 1.00 0.97 0.96
F11 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.92
F8 0.95 0.95 0.91 0.89 0.87
F7 0.91 0.91 0.88 0.86 0.84
F5 0.88 0.88 0.84 0.82 0.81
F4 0.84 0.84 0.80 0.78 0.77
F3 0.80 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.74
F2 0.78 0.78 0.74 0.72 0.71
r = (temporary
(temporary load)/(total
load)/(total load), where
where the term ‘temporary
‘temporary load’ in this context refers to loads that act for a
duration of less than 12 months; when the temporary load causes a stress reversal, then the value of r to
be used is 1.0.
TABLE C2
MATERIAL
MATERIAL CONSTANT
CONSTANT FOR BEAMS
BEAMS OF
OF UNSEA
UNSEASONE
SONED
D TIMBER
TIMBER
Material constant
Stress grade
r = 0 r = 0.25 r = 0.50 r = 0.75 r = 1.0
F34 1.32 1.32 1.22 1.17 1.13
F27 1.27 1.27 1.18 1.13 1.09
F22 1.22 1.22 1.13 1.08 1.05
F17 1.17 1.17 1.09 1.04 1.01
F14 1.14 1.14 1.05 1.01 0.97
F11 1.09 1.09 1.01 0.97 0.94
F8 1.05 1.05 0.97 0.93 0.90
F7 1.01 1.01 0.94 0.89 0.87
F5 0.97 0.97 0.90 0.86 0.83
F4 0.93 0.93 0.86 0.83 0.80
F3 0.90 0.90 0.83 0.80 0.77
F2 0.87 0.87 0.81 0.77 0.75
r = (temporary
load)/(total load), where the term ‘temporary load’
load’ in this context
context refers to loads that act for a
duration of less than 12 months; when the temporary load causes a stress reversal, then the value of r to
be used is 1.0.
TABLE C3
AS 1720.1—1988 54
MATERIAL
MATERIAL CONSTANT
CONSTANT FOR COLUMNS
COLUMNS OF SEASON
SEASONED
ED TIMBER
TIMBER
Material constant
Stress grade
r = 0 r = 0.25 r = 0.50 r = 0.75 r = 1.0
F34 1.26 1.26 1.20 1.17 1.14
F27 1.22 1.22 1.16 1.12 1.10
F22 1.18 1.18 1.12 1.09 1.06
F17 1.13 1.13 1.07 1.04 1.02
F14 1.10 1.10 1.04 1.01 0.99
F11 1.06 1.06 1.00 0.97 0.95
F8 1.01 1.01 0.96 0.94 0.92
F7 0.98 0.98 0.93 0.90 0.88
F5 0.95 0.95 0.90 0.87 0.85
F4 0.91 0.91 0.86 0.84 0.82
F3 0.88 0.88 0.83 0.81 0.79
F2 0.85 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.77
r = (temporary
load)/(total load), where the term ‘temporary
‘temporary load’ in this context
context refers to loads that act
for a duration of less than 12 months. When a member is normally subjected
subjected to axial tension
tension stress,
stress,
but may act in compress
compression
ion due to temporary
temporary loads
loads such as winds,
winds, the material
material constant
constant may be
taken from Table C1 for the case of r = 1.0.
TABLE C4
MATERIAL
MATERIAL CONSTANT
CONSTANT FOR COLUM
COLUMNS
NS OF
OF UNSEASO
UNSEASONED
NED TIMBER
TIMBER
Material constant
Stress grade
r = 0 r = 0.25 r = 0.50 r = 0.75 r = 1.0
F34 1.44 1.44 1.30 1.23 1.18
F27 1.39 1.39 1.26 1.19 1.14
F22 1.35 1.35 1.22 1.15 1.10
F17 1.30 1.30 1.18 1.11 1.06
F14 1.27 1.27 1.14 1.08 1.03
F11 1.22 1.22 1.11 1.04 1.00
F8 1.18 1.18 1.07 1.01 0.97
F7 1.15 1.15 1.03 0.98 0.94
F5 1.11 1.11 1.00 0.94 0.91
F4 1.07 1.07 0.97 0.91 0.87
F3 1.04 1.04 0.94 0.88 0.85
F2 1.01 1.01 0.91 0.86 0.82
r = (temporary
load)/(total load), where the term ‘temporary
‘temporary load’ in this context
context refers to loads that act
for a duration of less than 12 months. When a member is normally subjected
subjected to axial tension
tension stress,
stress,
but may act in compress
compression
ion due to temporary
temporary loads
loads such as winds,
winds, the material
material constant
constant may be
taken from Table C2 for the case of r = 1.0.
C3 SLENDERNESS COEFFICIENTS FOR BEAMS.

C3.1 General.
General. To evaluate
evaluate the stability
stability factor k 12 referred
referred to in Clause
Clause 2.5.7, the slenderness
slenderness
coefficient S 1 of a beam
beam shall
shall be defined
defined by —
S1 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C5)
where
( EI ) x = the rigidity in bending about the x- x axis
ymax = distance from the neutral axis to the extreme fibre
M cr = critical elastic buckling moment of the beam, applies about the major axis.
NOTE: In some odd cases, the evaluation of the above equation for a solid beam of rectangular section, can lead to
a value of S 1 greater than given by the equations in Clause 3.2.3. In such a case, the value as given by Clause 3.2.3
may be used for obtaining k 12 (Equation 3.8(a), 3.8(b) and 3.8(c)).
The evaluation
evaluation of the slendernes
coefficient requires
requires a knowledge of M cr, the critic
critical
al elasti
elasticc
buckling moment. Values of the critical elastic moment for particular structural situations can be
obtained from standard texts on structural analysis. However, as an aid to design, some values of
the critical elastic moment are presented in the following paragraphs.
C3.2 End-supported beams.
C3.2.1 General. The followi
following
ng recomm
recommendendati
ations
ons are applic
applicabl
ablee to end-su
end-suppo
pporte
rted
d beams
beams of
bisymmetrical cross-section for which the contribution of warping stiffness to the buckling strength
may be neglected.
55 AS 1720.1—1988
The ends at supports are assumed to be effectively

effectively restrained
restrained against
against twisting. This condition will
be satisfied if the supports possess a torsional stiffness in excess of 20( GJ )/
)/ L, where GJ is the
torsional rigidity of the beam and L is its length.
For inform
informati
ation
on on more
more genera
generall section
sections,
s, includ
including
ing the effect
effectss of warpin
warping
g stiffne
stiffness,
ss, a useful
useful
reference is the following:
NETHERCOT, D.A. and ROCKEY, K.C., ‘Unified Approach to the Elastic Lateral Buckling of
Beams’, The Structural Engineer , vol. 49, No 7, July 1971, pp 321-330. (For erratum see vol. 51,
No 4, April 1973, pp 138-139.)
C3.2.2 Beams with intermediate buckling restraints. The critical elastic value of the maximum
moment
moment between two buckling restraint
restraintss may be taken as —
M cr = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C6)
where
g25 = constant
constant obtained
obtained from
from Table C5
Lay = distance
distance between
between effectively
effectively rigid buckling restraints
restraints
( EI )x, = effective
effective rigidity
rigidity for bending
bending about
about the
the major and
and minor axes
axes respectivel
respectively
y
( EI )y
(GJ ) = effect
effective
ive torsio
torsional
nal rigidit
rigidity.
y.
NOTE: In computing the effective torsional
torsional rigidity of beams of solid rectangular
rectangular cross-section of G can
cross-section,, the value of G
be obtained from Table 2.3 and the value of J is given by—
J =
TABLE C5
COEFFICIENTS FOR SLENDERNESS FACTOR OF BISYMMETRICAL
BEAMS WITH INTERMEDIATE BUCKLING RESTRAINTS
Slenderness factor g25
Moment parameter β Free restraint condition*
condition* Fixed restraint
restraint condition*
condition*
(see Figure C1(c))
1.0 3.1 6.3
0.5 4.1 8.2
0.0 5.5 11.1
-0.5 7.3 14.0
-1.0 8.0 14.0
* The buckling
buckling restraints
restraints must
must prevent
prevent rotation
rotation of the about the z-axis. The terms ‘free’ and ‘fixed’
the beam about
restraint condition refer to the possibility for rotation of the beam about the y- y axis at the restraint
locations, as shown in Figure C1.
FIGURE
FIGURE C1. NOTATION
NOTATION FOR BEAMS WITH
WITH INTERMED
INTERMEDIATE
IATE BUCKLING
BUCKLING
RESTRAINTS
AS 1720.1—1988 56
For rectan
rectangul
gular
ar sectio
sections
ns of solid
solid wood,
wood, a conser
conservat
vative
ive approx
approxima
imatio
tion
n to the value
value of slende
slenderne
rness
ss
coefficient
coefficient obtained
obtained from Equations C5 and C6 is —
S1 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C7)
C3.3 Beams
Beams with no intermedi
intermediate
ate buckling
buckling restraints.
restraints. For this
this case
case the critic
critical
al elasti
elasticc value
value of
maximum moment may be taken as:
M cr = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C8)
where
( EI ) x, ( EI ) y, (GJ ) have the meanings defined in Paragraph C3.2.2
yh = height above
above centroid
centroid of the point of load application
application
g26, g27 = constants
constants obtained
obtained from Table
Table C6
Lay = L = span of beam.
For beams loaded only by end moments, Equation C8 may be used with g 27 = yh = 0 and the coefficient
g26 taken from Table C5.
For rectan
rectangul
gular
ar sectio
sections
ns of solid
solid wood,
wood, a conser
conservat
vative
ive approxi
approximat
mation
ion of the value
value of slende
slenderne
rness
ss
coefficient
coefficient obtained
obtained from Equation C8 and C5 is —
S1 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C9)
Equation C7 and C9 are good approximations for B ≤ 0.5 D.

NOTE: In Table C6, the values of the coefficient is g26 and g27 apply to beams with lateral restraints only at their end points.
However, these coefficients may be used for any other beam load system that has a similar shape of bending moment diagram
between points of lateral restraint.
C3.4 Continuously restrained beams. For beams of bisymmetrical cross-section, continuously restrained
against lateral displacement at a distance y o below the neutral axis (see Figure C2), the critical elastic
moment M cr may be taken as—
M cr = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C10)
where
yh = the locati
location
on above
above the neutral
neutral axis
axis of the loading
loading point
point (see
(see Figure
Figure C2)
Laφ = distance
distance between
between points
points of
of effectively
effectively rigid
rigid rotational
rotational restrain
restraints.
ts.
NOTE: The parameter yh may take on negative
negative values. If Equation C10 leads to a negative
negative value of M of M cr = ∞
of M cr, then a value of M
may be used to compute the slenderness coefficient S , i.e. S =
S = 0.0. A rotational
rotational restraint may be obtained by the use of diagonal
diagonal
flybraces.
C4 SLENDERNESS COEFFICIENTS FOR COLUMNS.
C4.1
C4.1 End End supp
suppor
orte
ted
d colu
column
mns.s. Eva
Evaluat
luatio
ion
n of the the sta
stabili
bility
ty fac
factor
tor k 12 referred to in
Clauses
Clauses 2.5.7 and 3.3.2.1,
3.3.2.1, requires an evaluation
evaluation first of the slenderness
coefficient of a column,
column, denoted
by S 3 for bending only about the major axis and S 4 for bending only about the minor minor axis. The value of
the slenderness
coefficient shall be obtained from —
1/2
S = [0.823 ( EA)/ Pcr] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C11)
where
( EA) = the effect
effective
ive axial
axial rigidi
rigidity
ty
Pcr = the critical elastic axial buckling load of the column.
Both ( EA) and Pcr are referenced to the appropriate axis.
C4.2 Continuously restrained columns. For a bisymmetrical column, continuously restrained against
lateral displacement at a distance y o from the neutral axis (see Figure C3), the slenderness coefficient with
respect to lateral buckling may be obtained from the following equations:
S = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C12)
Pcr = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C13)
57 AS 1720.1—1988
where
( EA) = effect
effective
ive axial
axial rigidi
rigidity
ty
( EI )x, = effective
effective bending
bending rigidity
rigidity about major and minor
minor axes respecti
respectively
vely
( EI )y
(GJ ) = effect
effective
ive torsio
torsional
nal rigidi
rigidity
ty
ye = distance from centroid to the point of load application, Figure C3
Laφ = distance between points of effectively rigid rotational restraints.
of Pcr, then a value of Pcr = ∞
NOTE: The parameter Y e may take on negative values. If Equation C13 leads to a negative value of P
may be used in computing the slenderness coefficient S , i.e. S = 0.0.
TABLE C6
COEFFICIENTS FOR SLENDERNESS FACTORS OF BISYMMETRICAL BEAMS WITH
NO INTERMEDIATE BUCKLING RESTRAINTS
Bending moment Condition of end restraint against Slenderness factors
Loading M rotation about y- y axis* g26 g27
Free 3.6 1.4
Fixed 6.1 1.8
Free 4.1 4.9

Fixed 5.4 5.2
Free 4.2 1.7

Fixed 6.7 2.6
Free 5.3 4.5

Fixed 6.5 5.3
Free 3.3 1.3

Fixed — —
Fixed 4.0 2 .0
Fixed 6.4 2 .0
*
For direction of y- y axis, see diagram in figure C1 (free ends of cantilevers excepted).
AS 1720.1—1988 58
59 AS 1720.1—1988
C5 BEAM-COLUMN BENT ABOUT BOTH AXES. For the case of a beam-column of
rectangular
rectangular cross section, subjected
subjected to an axial compressio
compressionn load and bent about both axes,
the following conservative criteria for strength may be used in the absence of more accurate
information.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C14
(C14(a
(a))
))
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C1
(C14(b)
4(b)))
NOTE: Equations C14(a) and C14(b) contains an allowance for the effect of bending moment amplification
due to the axial load. For non-rectangula
non-rectangularr members, Equations C14(a) and C14(b) may be used in the absence
of other information.
C6 SPACED COLUMNS.
C6.1 Definition
Definitions.
s. Spaced
Spaced column
columnss have
have the indivi
individua
duall shafts
shafts spaced
spaced apart
apart by end and
intermediate packing pieces or batten plates. These packing pieces and batten plates may be
fastened
fastened by glue, nails, screws, bolts or split-ring
split-ring connectors.
connectors. The notation
notation used for spaced
spaced
columns is shown in Figure C4.
NOTE: The following paragraphs
paragraphs provide a design procedure
procedure for a particular
particular set of spaced columns. For spaced
columns with other parameters and geometrics, design information may be obtained from overseas Standards.
C6.2 Special requirements for spaced columns.
C6.2.1 Size of connecting pieces. Packing pieces and batten plates shall be large enough
to accommodate the required number of fasteners.
End packing pieces shall not be shorter in length measured along the column axis than 6
times the thickness of the thinnest shaft.
Intermediate packing pieces shall be not less than 230 mm long in the direction of the
column axis.
C6.2.2 Bolted connections. Bolts
Bolted connections Bolts shall
shall not be used
used with
with unseas
unseasone
onedd timber
timber unless
unless it is
practicable to ensure that they are tightened periodically as the timber dries out and shrinks.
C6.2.3 Glued connections. Batten plates may be glued to the shafts but sufficient nails or
other
other mechan
mechanica
icall fasten
fasteners
ers shall
shall also
also be employ
employeded to transm
transmit
it the shearing
shearing force.
force. This
provision does not apply to glued packing pieces, but if nails, screws or bolts are used to
obtain clamping
clamping pressure then they shall be used in sufficient
sufficient number and at suitable
suitable spacing
spacing
to obtain adequate pressure over the full area of each piece.
C6.2.4 Spacin
Spacing
g of interm
intermedi
ediate
ate packin
packingg pieces
pieces and batten plates.. The centre-to-c
batten plates centre-to-centre
entre
distance between packing pieces or batten plates shall not exceed the least of the following:
(a) one-third of the distance between centres
centres of the end packing pieces or end batten plates;
(b) 30 times the thickness
thickness of the thinnest
thinnest shaft;
shaft;
(c) the value such that the slendern
slenderness
ess coeffic
coefficien
ientt of the portion
portion of an indivi
individua
duall shaft
shaft
between any pair of packing pieces or batten plates is not greater than 0.7 times the
maximum slenderness coefficient of the whole column, where the effective length of
the individu
individual
al shaft
shaft is taken
taken as equal
equal to the distan
distance
ce L s (see
(see Figure
Figure C4) betwee
between n
centroids
centroids of the fasteners
fasteners or glued areas
areas in the adjacent
adjacent packing pieces or batten
batten plates.
C6.2.5 Distance between shafts. The clear space between individual shafts shall not exceed
3 times the thickness of the thinnest shaft measured in the same plane.
C6.2.6 Battened columns. Batten plates shall not be made from unseasoned timber.
C6.3 Shear between components.
C6.3.1 The design shear force . The connections between the packing pieces or batten plates
of spaced columns shall be designed to transmit the stresses resulting from a lateral shear
force—
V = V 1 + V 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C15)
where
V 1 = shear
shear force
force due to applied
applied loads
loads
V 2 = shear
shear force
force due to curvat
curvature
ure of the column
column
= 0.75
.75P for end packing piece or batten plates
= 0.00
0.001
1 ( L
Lay / d
d) P for intermediate packing pieces or batten plates
AS 1720.1—1988 60
P = axial
axial colum
column n load
load
Lay = distance
distance between
between points of lateral restraint on the spaced columns. columns. (An end
pack
packining
g piec
piecee or batt
battenen plat
platee shal
shalll be requ
requir ired
ed at each
each poin
pointt of late
latera
rall
restraint.)
d = a + 2t s.
C6.3.2 Force
Force effect
effectss on packin
packing pieces. The
g pieces The inte
interf
rfac
acee of each
each pack
packin ingg piec
piecee and
and its
its
connections shall be designed to transmit a shear force V pack equal to—
V pack = VLs / a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C16)
where
V = resulting
resulting lateral
lateral force as defined
defined in Paragraph
Paragraph C6.3.1
Ls = the centre-to-ce
centre-to-centre
ntre distance
distance of packing pieces, pieces, see Figure
Figure C4
a = distance
distance between
between shafts
shafts (see Figure C4). C4).
(a)
(a) Colu
Column
mn fabr
fabric
icat
ated
ed with
with pack
packin
ing
g piec
pieces
es (b)
(b) Col
Columnfab
mnfabricate
c ated
d withba
withbatt
tte
en pla
plates
FIGURE
FIGURE C4. SPACED
SPACED COLUMNS
COLUMNS
61 AS 1720.1—1988
C6.3.3 Force effects on batten

batten plates. Each Each batten
batten plate and its connecti connections ons shall be
designed to transmit simultaneously a longitudinal shear force V bat and moment M bat, given
by —
V bat = 0.5VLs /(a + t s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C17)
and
M bat = 0.25
.25VLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C18)
where
V = resulting
resulting lateral
lateral force as defined
defined in Paragraph
Paragraph C6.3.1
Ls = the
the cent
centre
re-t
-to-
o-ce
cent
ntre
re dist
distan
ance
ce betw
betwee eenn batt
batten
en platplates
es as defi define
ned
d in
Paragraph C6.2.4
a = distance
distance between
between shafts
shafts (see Figure C4) C4)
t s = shaft thickne
thickness
ss (see
(see Figure C4).
C6.4 Permissible loads.

C6.4.1 Slenderness coefficients.
C6.4.1.1 Slenderness coefficients of individual shafts. The effective length L s of individual
shafts of spaced columns shall be taken as the distance measured along the column axis
between centroids of the fastener groups or glued areas in adjacent packing pieces or batten
plates.
plates. From this effective length,
length, the slenderness
slenderness coefficients
coefficients of the individual
individual shafts
shafts may
be obtained in accordance with Clause 3.3.2.
C6.4.1.2 Slenderness
Slenderness coefficient
coefficient of composite
composite cross-sect ions. For spaced
cross-sections spaced columns
columns with
packing
packing pieces, composed
composed of two shafts
shafts of timber,
timber, the slendernes
coefficient for bending
bending
about the y-axis will be denoted by S 5 and is given
given by
by —
S 5 = 0.3g13g28 L( A/I )1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C19)
where
g13, g28 = modificatio
modificationn factors as
as given in Table
Table 3.2 and Table
Table C7 respectivel
respectively.
y.
L = length
length of comp
composiosite
te colu
column
mn
I = seco
second
nd mome
moment nt of area
area (mom
(momenentt of iner
inerti
tia)
a) of the
the net
net comp
compos
osit
itee
cross-section about the y-axis
A = net cross
cross-se
-secti
ctiona
onall area of the
the shafts
shafts..
The slendernes
coefficient for bending
bending about the x-axis may be taken to be that of a solid
timber column having the cross-sections shown in Figure C4.
TABLE C7
MODIFICATION FACTOR g28 FOR THE EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF
SPACED COLUMNS
Space Value of g 28
Shaft spacing
Glued packing pieces and Packing pieces and batten plates

batten plates fastened by metal connectors
(see Figure C4)

0 1.0 1.6
1 1.1 2.2
2 1.3 2.7
3 1.4 3.0
C6.4.2 Design procedure. The permiss

permissibl
iblee load shall
shall be taken
taken as the least of —
(a) that for a solid column whose
whose area is that of the sum of the cross-sectiona
cross-sectionall areas of the
shafts, bending about the x-axis;
(b)
(b) that
that for
for a colu
column
mn bend
bendin
ingg abou
aboutt the
the y-axis,
-axis, whose
whose geomet
geometric
rical
al proper
propertie
tiess of
cross-section are those of the composite column but whose slenderness coefficient is
as given in Equation C19, however, in the use of this slenderness coefficient, the load
sharing factor k 8 = 2.00 shall be used for computing the permissible stress on the spaced
column;
column; and
(c) the sum of the permissible
permissible loads for the individual
individual shafts
shafts where the permissible
permissible load
load for
each shaft is equal to that for a solid column, the effective length of which is equal to
the values of Ls defined in Paragraph C6.4.1.1.
C7 BUCKLING RESTRAINTS.
C7.1 Definitions. For most design situations, no check need be made on the effectiveness
of buckling restraints. However in the case of an unusually light restraint system being used
for a critical (i.e. non-load-sharing) engineered structure it may be advisable to assess the
effect and the capacity of the restraints.
AS 1720.1—1988 62
The following method may be used for a design of slender beams and columns having
equally spaced buckling restraints. The restraint systems considered are either lateral or
torsional
torsional ones as shown in Figure C5, where the restraint restraint stiffnesses
stiffnesses K A and K B are defined
as follows:
follows:
PR = K A ∆A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C20)
T R = K B φB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C21)
where PR and T R are the restraint force and torque respectively that occur when the point
of attachment of the restraint to the beam undergoes a displacement ∆ A and rotation φB. It
is assumed that the ends of beams are effectively restrained against torsional rotation (see
Paragraph C3.2.1).
C7.2 Notation. Notation to be used in this Paragraph is as follows:
h26 = 1.0 when
when loads
loads are live loads
loads only
only
= 1.5 when loads are dead loads
loads only and timber is initially seasone
seasoned
d
= 2.0 when loads are dead
dead loads only and timber
timber is initially
initially unseasoned
unseasoned (Values
(Values
of h26 for other conditions may be obtained by linear interpolation)
h27 = 1.0 for
for sawn
sawn membe
members rs
= 0.4 for laminated
laminated and other carefully fabricat
fabricateded timber members
members
g38 = less
lesser
er of (m + 1)/2 and 5
m = number
number of members supported
supported by each restrain
restraintt system
n = number
number of equally
equally spaced intermedia
intermediate
te restraints
restraints
S max = slendernes
coefficient if there are no restraints
restraints
S min = slendernes
coefficient if the restraints
restraints are effectively
effectively rigid.
(a) Column lateral (b) Beam lateral (c) Beam torsional

restraint restraint restraint
FIGURE C5. INTERMEDIATE RESTRAINTS

C7.3 Columns.
C7.3.1 Load capacity
capacity. In computing the load capacity of a column of length L with n
intermediate lateral restraints as shown in Figure C5(a), the slenderness coefficient S 4 for
buckling
buckling about the minor axis may be taken as —
S4 = ............. .................. .......... (C22)
but not less than S min and not more than S max and where —
α1 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C23)
A similar method may be used to compute the effect of restraints against buckling about the
major axis.
C7.3.2 Force on lateral restraints . The design force P R on each lateral restraint may be
taken to be given by—
PR = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C24)
where Pa is the applied axial load on the column.

63 AS 1720.1—1988
C7.4 Beam with lateral restraints.

C7.4.1 Load capacity. In computing the load capacity of a beam of length L with n intermediate lateral
restraints as shown in Figure C5(b), the slenderness coefficient S 1 may be taken as —
S1 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C25)
but not less than S min and not more than S max and where
where —
α2 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C26)
C7.4.2 Force on lateral restraints. The design force P R on the lateral restraints may be taken to be given
by —
PR = for
for membe
members
rs of rect
rectan
angu
gula
larr sectio
section
n and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C27
(C27(a
(a))
))
for box beams
PR = for
for I-be
I-beam
amss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C27
(C27(b
(b))
))
where M a is the applied bending moment on the beam.
C7.5 Beam with torsional restraints.
C7.5.1 Load capacity. In computing the load capacity of a beam of length L with n intermediate lateral
restraints as shown in Figure C5(c), the slenderness coefficient S 1 may be taken as —
S1 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C28)
but not less than S min and not more than S max and where
where —
α3 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C29)
C7.5.2 Torque
Torque on torsional restraints. The design torque T R on each restraint may be taken to be given
torsional restraints
by —
T R = for
for membe
members
rs of rect
rectan
angu
gula
larr sectio
section
n and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C30
(C30(a
(a))
))
for box beams
T R = for
for I-be
I-beam
amss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C30
(C30(b
(b))
))
where M a is the applied bending moment on the beam.

C8 CONCENTRATED LOADS AND PARTIAL AREA LOADS ON GRID SYSTEMS.
C8.1 General. In the absence of further information,
information, the following
following provides a method for assessing
assessing the
lateral distribution effects of a beam grid system with respect to concentrated and partial area loads. The
load sharing factor k 9 specified in Clause 2.5.5.3 may be taken as additional to the following lateral
distribution effects.
C8.2 Concentrated load. For a beam located within a grid system and subjected to a point load P as
shown in Figure C6(a), the maximum bending and shear stresses,
stresses, and also the maximum
maximum deflection,
deflection, may
be taken to be equal to that of an isolated beam loaded by a point load P eff define
defined
d by —
Peff = g42P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C31)
where g42 is bounded by the range 0.2 ≤ g42 ≤ 1.0, and in this range it is given by —
g42 = 0.20
0.20 log
log10(hB / nChC) + 0.
0.95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C32)
where
hB = E B I B / L3
hC = E c I c / s3
E B I B, E C I C = flexural
flexural rigidity
rigidity of a single beam
beam and a single crossin
crossing
g member
member respectively
respectively
nC = number
number of cros crossin
sing
g membe
membersrs
L, s = span
span and spaci spacing
ng of beams
beams (see
(see Figure
Figure C6).
C6).
For Equation C32 to hold, the centroid of the loads must lie within the middle half of the beam, and the
loaded beam must be at least two beams in from the edge. For loads outside these limits, g 42 may be
obtained by interpolating between the above value of g 42 and 1.0.
Values of g42 derived according to Equation C32 are shown in Figure C7.
NOTE: If the point load P shown in Figure C6(a) is located somewhere
somewhere between two main beams, then a conservative
conservative load
distribution factor may be obtained by using the value g43 given in Paragraph
Paragraph C8.3 for the case of a partial area
area load of width
equal to s.
AS 1720.1—1988 64
FIGURE C6. NOTATION FOR BEAM-GRID SYSTEM SHOWING

CONCENTRATED AND PARTIAL AREA LOADS
FIGURE C7. GRID FACTORS g 42 AND g 43

65 AS 1720.1—1988
C8.3 Partial area load. For a beam located within a grid system and subjected to a load of intensity w
distributed uniformly over an area of width a as shown in Figure C6(b), the maximum bending and shear
stresses, and also the maximum deflection may be taken to be equal to that of an isolated beam loaded
by a load of intensity w eff defined by —
weff = g43w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C33)
For the case of a = s, the value of g43 is given
given by —
g43 = 0.15 log10(hB / nchc) + 0.75
0.75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C34
(C34))
The value of g43 is bounded by 0.2 ≤ g43 ≤ 1.0.
For the case of a = 0, the value of g43 is given by g42 as in Equation C32.
For the case of 0 < a < s, the value of g43 may be obtained by linear interpolation between the two above
cases.
For Equation C34 to hold, the centroid of the loads must lie within the middle half of the beam, and the
loaded beam must be at least two beams in from the edge. For loads outside these limits, g 43 may be
obtained by interpolating between the above value and 1.0.
Values of g43 derived according to Equation C34 are shown in Figure C7.
C9 NOTCHED BEAMS. For a rectangular beam of depth d, notched as shown in Figure C8, the nominal
maximum bending stress f b = and nominal maximum shear stress f s = 3V /2bd n calculated for the
net section shall comply with the following interaction equation:
f b + 4 f s ≤ g40F sj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C35)
where g40 is computed as shown in Table C8 and F sj is the permissible shear stress for joint details
from —
Fsj = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C36)
where the factors k 1 to k 12 are given in Section 2.
The stability
stability factor k 12 need
need not be consid
considere
ered
d in checki
checking
ng the fractu
fracture
re streng
strength
th of notche
notched
d beams,
beams,
provided that the notch is not located within the middle third of the beam.
Defects shall not be permitted within 150 mm of the notch roots of critical beams, i.e. non-load-sharing
beams.
If, according to the sign convention shown in Figure C8, ƒ b is negative, it may be taken as zero in the
application of Equation C35. Similarly, if ƒ s is negative, it may also be taken as zero in the application
of Equation C35.
NOTE: In addition to the check on fracture strength according to Equation C35, the net section of depth d n must also be checked
for its unnotched strength according to Clause 3.2.1, i.e. f b ≤ F b and f s ≤ F s. Moreover, it should be noted that in calculating the
shear stress f s for use in Equation C35, all loads on the beam shall be taken into consideration,
consideration, including
including those loads lying within
within
a distance of 1.5 times the height of the beam from the inside face of the support.
It should be noted that notching
notching creates a significant
significant reduction in the strength
strength of a beam unlessunless the notching
notching is limited to the
vicinity of support points. The adverse effects of notching may be minimized by increasing the opening angle of the notch.
A typical example of a beam notched on the compression edge would be that of a continuous member notched over a support
across which it rests. In this case f b may be neglected, but an effective value of f
of f s still occurs for use in Equation C35.
FIGURE
FIGURE C8. NOTATION
NOTATION FOR
FOR NOTCH
AS 1720.1—1988 66
TABLE C8
COEFFICIENT g40 FOR SAWN NOTCH ON BEAM EDGE
Notch angle slope g40

(see Figure C8) d notch > 0.1 d d notch < 0.1 d
lnotch / d
d notch = 0 9.0/d 0.45
3.2/
lnotch / d
d notch = 2 9.0/d 0.33
4.2/
lnotch / d
d notch = 4 9.0/d 0.24
5.2/
NOTE: lnotch, d notchand d are to be stated in millimetres.
C10 NOTCHED COLUMNS. For a column, notched in the middle third, and with a stability factor
k 12 < 0.5, a check shall be made that the fracture strength is adequate.
The fracture strength may be considered to be adequate if the member, considered as a beam, is capable
of sustaining a nominal bending stress f b = k 1F c(1 - 2k 12) at the notch root when a check is made in
accordance with Paragraph C9.
C11 NOTCHED TENSION MEMBERS. In the absence of other information the permissible nominal
tension stress in the net section of a notched member shall be taken to be equal to that of the permissible
bending stress of a similar notched member. This permissible bending stress shall be computed according
to Equation C36 except that the factors k 12 may be omitted.
In computing the nominal tension stress, due account shall be taken of any stresses induced by bending
due to notching and any other geometric asymmetries.
67 AS 1720.1—1988
APPENDIX D
JOINTS IN TIMBER STRUCTURES
D1 CONNECTORS FOR PLYWOOD.

D1.1 General. The following paragraphs refer to the use of nail and screw connectors to join
plywood to solid timber.
D1.2 Strength of joints with plywood.
D1.2.1 Joint strength grouping.
grouping. The grouping of common timber species for joint design is given
in Tables 2.1 and 2.2.
(a) Fastener in single shear (b) Fastener in double shear

FIGURE
FIGURE D1. PLYWOOD
PLYWOOD THICKNESS
THICKNESS AND NAIL LENGTH
LENGTH
D1.2.2 Permissible lateral loads for nails and screws in plywood . The permissible load for a laterally
loaded plywood-to-t
plywood-to-timber
imber joint fastened with nails or screws
screws may be taken as 10 percent greater than the
values given for timber-to-timber joints in Section 4 except that fastener diameter and length and plywood
thickness
thickness (see
(see figure D1) shall be such that —
t o / D > 1.5
t p / D > 10
t w / D > 10
where
D = nail
nail diam
diamete
eter,
r, in
in mill
millime
imetre
tress
t o = thickn
thickness
ess of
of plywoo
plywood
d as indicat
indicated
ed in Figure
Figure D1, in millimet
millimetres
res
t p = penetr
penetrati
ation
on of nail
nail as indi
indicat
cated
ed in Figure
Figure D1, in millim
millimetr
etres
es
t w = thickn
thickness
ess of solid
solid timber
timber as indicated
indicated in Figure
Figure D1, in millime
millimetre
tress
For values of (t o / D) < 1.5, the basic load shall be reduced reduced linearly with respect
respect to ( t o / D) so as to reach zero
when (t o / D) = 0. For values of t p / D and t w / D less than 10, the basic load shall also be reduced linearly with
respect to t p / D and t w / D but in addition
addition the fastener
fastener shall be considered
considered as non-load-bearing
non-load-bearing if either either t p / D
or t w / D is less than 5. These requirements shall apply whether the fastener is in single or double shear.
AS 1720.1—1988 68
In the case of shear joints, such as occurs in the nailing of plywood webs to the solid timber flanges of
box beams, the multiple nail factor k 17 = 1.0 shall be used in Equation 4.1
D2 DEFORMATION OF JOINTS.
D2.1 General. The load-displacement characteristics of a joint are highly nonlinear. However, where a
linear joint stiffness is required for design
design purposes,
purposes, a secant
secant stiffness
stiffness may be used. A suitable
suitable definition
definition
of the secant stiffness ( K sec) is given by —
K sec = Po / ∆o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D1
(D1)
where ∆o is the deformation
deformation of the joint (including
(including long duration
duration effects) when the design
design load P o is
applied.
In the following paragraphs, the equations of deformation are good estimates for the deformation due to
the first application of a load; for repeated loads, due allowance must be made for incremental slip and
changes in joint stiffness.
Where both a long duration load PD and a short duration load P L act on a connector, then non-linear load-
deformation characteristics must be considered in evaluating the maximum deformation. In the absence
of furt
furthe
herr info
inform
rmat
atio
ion,
n, the
the maxi
maximu
mumm defo
deform
rmat
atio
ion
n may
may be take
takenn to be equa
equall to the
the long
long dura
durati
tion
on
deformation due to load PD minus the short duration deformation due to load P D plus the short duration
deformation due to load PD + PL.
D2.2 Displacement of nailed and screwed joints in solid timber. The displacement of nailed or screwed
joints in single shear for solid-wood to solid-wood joints may be estimated as follows:
(a) For displacements ∆ < 0.5
displacements 0.5 mm
mm
∆ = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D2(
(D2(aa))
where
∆ = joint displace
displacement,
ment, in millimetre
millimetress
D = diameter
diameter of nail or screw,
screw, in millimetres
millimetres
j12 = dura
durati
tion
on fac
facto
torr give
given
n in
in Tabl
Tablee D2
D2
P = load
load per nail or screw,
screw, in newton
newtonss
h32 = stiffn
stiffness
ess facto
factorr given
given in Table D1.
(b) For a displacement of ∆ = 2.5 mm —
displacement
P = 0.165 D 1.75 j13h32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D2(
0.165 (D2(b)
b)))
where the duration factor j13 is given in Table D2.
(c) For a displac
displaceme nt 0.5 mm < ∆ < 2.5 mm the corresponding applied load P shall be obtained by
ement
linear interpolation between the values to give ∆ = 0.5
0.5 mm and ∆ = 2.5 mm.
mm and
NOTES:
displacement ∆ = 2.5 mm usually occurs for applied loads above the allowable design load; however this value is included
1. The displacement
for interpolation purposes for 0.5 mm < ∆ < 2.5 mm.
2. For the case of metal and plywood side plates, Equations
Equations D2(a) and D2(b) lead to conservative over-esti
over-estimates
mates of nail slip.
D2.3 Displacemen
Displacementt of solid timber
timber joints fabricated with bolts,
bolts, split-ring
split-ring connector
connectorss and shear
shear plates
plates
connectors.
D2.3.1 General. Where relevant specific test information is not available, the following paragraphs may
be used to estimate
estimate the displaceme
displacement
nt of joints fabricated
fabricated with bolts, split-ring
split-ring connectors
connectors and shear-plate
shear-plate
connectors.
D2.3.2 For loads acting parallel to the grain . For this case, the displacement ∆ may be taken to be given
by —
∆ = ∆i + j
( j14 / h33)( P / ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D3
(D3)
where
∆ = total
total disp
displac
laceme
ement,
nt, millim
millimetr
etres
es
∆i = initial
initial displace
displacement
ment due
due to
to oversize
oversize holes,
holes, millimetres
millimetres
= 0, for a load supe
superim
rimpos
posed
ed on an existi
existing
ng load,
load, otherw
otherwise
ise
= 1/ √ncon for bolted joints
= 1/2√ncon for split ring connectors or shear-plate connectors
69 AS 1720.1—1988
ncon = number
number of conne
connecto
ctorr sets
sets in the
the join
jointt
j14 = durati
duration
on fact
factor
or give
given
n in Table
Table D3
D3
h33 = stiffne
stiffness
ss factor
factor give
given
n in Table
Table D4
D4
P = applie
applied
d load
load per fasten
fastener,
er, in newto
newtons
ns
= basic
basic load
load per fastener
fastener as
as defined
defined in Section
Section 4, in newton
newtons.
s.
Equation D3 is a good approximation for applied loads up to the allowable design load.
D2.3.3 For loadings acting perpendicular displacement ∆ may be taken to
perpendicular to the grain . For this case the displacement
be given by —
∆ = ∆i + j
( j14 / h33 h35)( P / ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D4
(D4)
where
h35 = 1.5 for
for bolted
bolted joints
joints of
of Types
Types 1, 2 and 3 as defin
defined
ed in Table
Table 4.10
4.10
= 2.5 for
for bolted
bolted joints
joints of
of Type 4 as defin
defined
ed in Table
Table 4.10
4.10
= 1.0 for
for split-ring
split-ring connectors
connectors and
and shear-p
shear-plate
late connec
connectors
tors
P = applie
applied
d load
load per fasten
fastener,
er, in newto
newtons
ns
= basic
basic load
load per fastene
fastenerr as defined
defined in
in Section
Section 4, in newto
newtons
ns
∆i, j14 and h33 are taken as defined in Paragraph D2.3.2.
Equation D4 is a good approximation for applied loads up to the allowable design load.
TABLE D1
STIFFNESS FACTOR h 32 FOR CONNECTIONS OF SOLID TIMBER
Initial moisture condition Species joint group Factor h32
Unseasoned J1 1 450
J2 1 050
J3 750
J4 550
J5 410
J6 300
Seasoned JD1 1 600
JD2 1 250
JD3 990
JD4 750
JD5 590
JD6 470
TABLE D2
DURATION FACTORS j 12 AND j13
Initial moisture condition Duration of load Factor j12 Factor j13
Unseasoned More than 3 years 9 0.5
5 months 4 0.7
Less than 2 weeks 1 1
Seasoned More than 3 years 4 0.5
Less than 2 weeks 1 1
NOTE: If required, intermediate values of j12 and j13 may be obtained by linear nterpolation
nterpolation with log-time.
log-time.
TABLE D3
DURATION FACTOR j 14
Initial moisture condition Duration of load Factor j14
Unseasoned More than 3 years 4
5 months 2
2 weeks 1.5
Less than 5 minutes 1
Seasoned More than 3 years 3
5 months 2
2 weeks 1.5
Less than 5 minutes 1
Intermediate values of j14 may be obtained by linear interpolation with log-time.
NOTE: Intermediate
AS 1720.1—1988 70
D3 EQUATIONS AND TABLES FOR BASIC WORKING LOADS FOR BOLTS.

D3.1 Load . The basic
basic workin
workingg load for a singl
singlee bolt bearing
bearing parall
parallel
el to the
the grain
grain and
and actin
acting
g in
single shear
shear shall be the least
least of —
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D5
(D5)
in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J1
J1 and
and JD1
JD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D6)
(D6)
in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J2
J2 and
and JD2
JD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D7)
(D7)
in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J3,
J3, J4,
J4, JD3
JD3 and
and JD4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D8)
(D8)
in tim
timbe
berr in grou
groups
ps J5
J5 and
and JD5
JD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D9)
(D9)
in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J6
J6 and
and JD6
JD6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D10
(D10))
where
D = bolt diameter
t = effect
effective
ive timber
timber thickn
thickness
ess as define
defined
d in Table
Table 4.9(A)
4.9(A)
= appropriate
appropriate stress
stress value
value for
for the species
species group and seasoni
seasoning
ng condition
condition as
as given
given in Table D5.
Basic worki
rking loads computed in accordance with Equ
Equation D5 to D10 are given in
Tables 4.9(B) and 4.9(C).
D3.2 Load . The basic working
working load
load for a single
single bolt
bolt bearing
bearing perpendicul
perpendicular
ar to the grain and acting
acting
in single shear shall
shall not exceed the lesser
lesser of —
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D11)
√ D3 in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J1
J1 and
and JD1
JD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D12
(D12))
√ D3 in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J2
J2 and
and JD2
JD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D13
(D13))
√ D3 in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J3
J3 and
and JD3
JD3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D14
(D14))
√ D3 in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J4
J4 and
and JD4
JD4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D15
(D15))
√ D3 in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps J5
J5 and
and J6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D16
(D16))
√ D3 in tim
timbe
berr of grou
groups
ps JD5
JD5 and
and JD6
JD6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (D17
(D17))
where
D = bolt diameter
t = effective timber thickness as defined in Table 4.10(A)
= appropriate stress value for the species group and seasoning as given in Table D6.
Basic
Basic workin
workingg loads
loads comput
computeded in accord
accordanc
ancee with
with these
these equati
equations
ons are given
given in Tables
Tables 4.10(B
4.10(B)) and
4.10(C).
TABLE D4
STIFFNESS FACTOR h33
Factor
Initial moisture Bolted joints Split rings and shear
condition Without metal side With metal side plates plate connectors
plates
Unseasoned 2.0 3.0 1.2
Seasoned 2.5 3.8 1.5
TABLE D5
VALU
VALUES
ES OF FOR
FOR BO
BOLT
LTED
ED JOIN
JOINTS
TS
Joint group J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6
16.5 13.0 10.5 8.3 6.6 5 .3
, MPa
Joint group JD1 JD2 JD3 JD4 JD5 JD6
20.5 16.5 13.0 10.5 8.3 6 .6
, MPa
TABLE D6
VALU
VALUES
ES OF FOR
FOR BO
BOLT
LTED
ED JOIN
JOINTS
TS
Joint group J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6
6.6 5.2 3.3 2.1 1.4 0 .7
, MPa
Joint group JD1 JD2 JD3 JD4 JD5 JD6
8.7 6.7 5.0 3.7 2.6 1 .8
, MPa
APPENDIX E
71 AS 1720.1—1988
BUCKLING STRENGTH OF PLYWOOD DIAPHRAGMS

E1 SCOPE. If large sheets of thin plywood are used in composite construction, it is possible for buckling
distortions to cause a reduction in the load capacity of the plywood membrane. In the following paragraph,
strength reductions of this type are stated in terms of a stability factor k 12 for some typical membranes and
plywood lay-ups.
E2 BUCKLING STRENGTH FOR DIAPHRAGMS LOADED IN-PLANE.
E2.1 General. The following paragraphs apply to the design of members constructed from continuous
sheets of plywood attached to continuous solid timber edge members. Where either of these is
discontinuous, these requirements shall apply only if they are spliced so as to develop the strength and
stiffness equivalent to that of continuous elements.
E2.2 Diaphragms with lateral edges supported and subjected to uniformly loaded edge forces.
E2.2.1 Slenderness coefficient . Figure E1 illustrates the notation to be used for a typical plywood
diaphragm. The diaphragm is of length L, depth d w, and thickness t w. The face grain of the plywood is at
an angle to the longitudinal edge as shown. The diaphragm is loaded along its edge by a combination
of stresses comprising a shear stress f s, a direct compression stress f c, and a compression stress due to
edgewise bending that has a maximum value of f cb.
Where all edges are simply supported, the slenderness coefficient S for computation of the stability factor
k 12 for resistance to the stresses f s, f c and f cb may be taken to be —
S = g60 (d w / t w) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E1)
where the factor g60 is given in Table E1.
For short panels in which the length L is less than the characteristic length L ch given in Table E2, the
slenderness coefficient may be taken to be —
S = g60 ( L / L ch)1/2 (d w / t w) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E2)
If the lateral edges AB and CD shown in Figure E1 are effectively fixed, and AD and BC are simply
supported, then the slenderness coefficients may be taken as 80 percent of those computed according to
Equations E1 and E2.
FIGURE E1. PLYWOOD DIAPHRAGM WITH SUPPORTED LATERAL EDGES

AB AND DC
AS 1720.1—1988 72
TABLE E1
FACTOR g60 FOR SLENDERNESS COEFFICIENTS OF PLYWOOD
DIAPHRAGMS WITH LATERAL EDGES SUPPORTED
Factor g60
Plywood lay-up* Stress f c Stress f cb Stress f s
= 0° = 90° = 0° = 90° = 0° = 90°

t po / t pi = 0.5
3 ply 0.71 0.71 0.28 0.28 0.46 0.30
5 or more plies 0.63 0.63 0.24 0.24 0.34 0.31
t po / t pi = 1.0
3 ply 0.93 0.66 0.37 0.26 0.60 0.31
5 or more plies 0.73 0.60 0.28 0.23 0.40 0.30
t po / t pi = 1.5
3 ply 1.05 0.61 0.41 0.24 0.67 0.31
5 or more plies 0.83 0.58 0.32 0.23 0.46 0.30
* All plies assumed to be of the same species; all inner plies assumed to be of equal thickness.
t po / t pi = ratio of thickness of outer to inner plies.
NOTE: For direction of , see Figure E1.
TABLE E2
CHARACTERISTIC LENGTH OF PANELS
Characteristic side ratio Lch / d w
(see Figure E1)
Plywood lay-up*
Stress f c Stress f cb Stress f s
= 0° = 90° = 0° = 90° = 0° = 90°

t po / tpi = 0.5
3 ply 1.54 0.65 1.09 0.46 1.65 0.69
5 or more plies 1.09 0.92 0.77 0.65 1.15 0.96
t po / tpi = 1.0
3 ply 1.93 0.52 1.37 0.37 2.13 0.57
5 or more plies 1.36 0.74 0.96 0.52 1.44 0.78
t po / tpi = 1.5
3 ply 2.12 0.47 1.50 0.33 2.38 0.53
5 or more plies 1.56 0.64 1.10 0.45 1.67 0.69
E2.2.2 Stability factor for edge shear stresses . The stability factor k 12 for the modification of the basic
working stress in shear shall be taken as the lesser of the following:
k 12 = 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E3(a))
k 12 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E3(b))
where
E = modulus of elasticity specified in Table 5.1, in megapascals
k 1 = duration factor as specified in Table 2.5
= basic design stress in shear as specified in Table 5.1, in megapascals
S = slenderness coefficient derived according to Paragraph E2.2.1
NOTE: From the data in Tables 5.1 and E1, it follows that k 12 = 1.0 for all plywood of stress grade equal to or greater than F7,
and web thickness ratio d w / t w ≤ 19.
E2.2.3 Stability factor for edge compression and edge bending stresses. The stability factor for the
modification of the basic working stress in compression, shall be taken to be the lesser of the following:
k12 = 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E4(a))
k12 = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E4(b))
where
E = modulus of elasticity specified in Table 5.1, in megapascals
k 1 = duration factor as specified in Table 2.5
= basic design stress in compression as specified in Table 5.1, in megapascals
S = slenderness coefficient derived according to Paragraph E2.2.1
NOTE: From the data in Tables 5.1 and E1, it follows that k 12 = 1.0 for all plywoods of stress grade equal to or less than F34,
and web thickness ratio d w / t w ≤ 10.
73 AS 1720.1—1988
E2.2.4 Permissible stresses. The permissible values of the stresses F s F b and F cb shall be obtained by
modifying the basic stresses and given in Table 5.1 by the factors k 1 and k 12, together with other
appropriate factors as specified in Sections 2 and 5.
E2.2.5 Stress combinations. When more than one type of stress acts simultaneously on the diaphragm, the
following interaction equation may be used to check the design:
( f c / F c) + ( f cb / F cb)2 + ( f s / F s)2 ≤ 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E5)
where F c, F cb and F s would be the permissible design values of f c, f cb and f s respectively if each type of
stress were acting on its own.
FIGURE E2. NOTATION FOR AXIALLY LOADED DIAPHRAGM WITH

FREE LATERAL EDGES AC AND BD
E2.3 Diaphragms with lateral edges free and subjected to uniformly loaded edge forces. For a
diaphragm, as shown in Figure E2, with lateral edges AC and BD free and end edges AB and CD simply
supported, the slenderness coefficient S for the stress f c may be taken to be given by —
S = g61(d w / t w) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E6)
where the factor g61 is given in Table E3. If the edges AB and CD are fixed, then the slenderness
coefficient may be taken to be 70 percent of that calculated by Equation E6.
The appropriate stability factor k l2 to be used for modification of the basic working stress is that given in
Equations 3.18(a), 3.18(b) and 3.18(c) of Clause 3.3.3 for solid timber members.
E2.4 Diaphragms subjected to concentrated edge forces.
E2.4.1 Effective width. In assessing the resistance of a plywood web to the concentrated load and support
reaction as shown in Figure E3, the effective bearing width of the load, denoted by l eff shall be taken as
follows:
(a) For the midspan concentrated load —
leff = lb + 2t f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E7)
(b) For the end support reaction —
leff = lb + t f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E8)
E2.4.2 Slenderness coefficients. In assessing the resistance of a plywood web to the concentrated load and
the support reaction as shown in Figure E3, the slenderness coefficient of the web shall be defined by the
following:
S= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E9)
and for the end support reaction —
S= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E10)
AS 1720.1—1988 74
where
g61, and g62 = the geometry factors given in Tables E3 and E4
d w, t w, t f and lb = the dimensions (in millimetres) indicated in Figure E3.
FIGURE E3. NOTATION FOR BEAM WITH UNSTIFFENED PLYWOOD WEB
E2.4.3 Stability factor . The stability

stability factor k 12 to be used for the modification of the basic working stress
is —
k12 = 1.0 0.5S( k1

1.0 - 0.5 / E)1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (E11
E11)
where
S = slendernes
coefficient
k 1 = durati
duration
on factor
factor specif
specified
ied in Table
Table 2.5
= basic design
design stress in compression
compression as specified
specified in Table 5.1, in megapasca
megapascals
ls
E = modulus
modulus of elasticity
elasticity as specified
specified in Table 5.1,
5.1, in megapascal
megapascals.
s.
E2.5 Stiffeners for beam webs. At supports or load points, where the buckling strength of the webs is
inadequate, the webs should be reinforced by vertical stiffeners. The size of the stiffeners will be adequate
if they extend the full width of the flanges and have a cross-section equal in area to that of one flange.
For webs in which the slenderness coefficient for the shear stress ( ƒ s), as shown in Figure E1, is greater
than 15, it is desirable
desirable that vertical
vertical stiffeners
stiffeners be placed
placed at intervals
intervals along
along the web in order to reduce shear
distortions normal to the web. It is recommended that each of these stiffeners have a cross sectional area
not less than 0.25 times the area of a flange and that they be spaced not further than 1.5 g 62d w apart, where
the factor g62 is given in Table E4.
All vertical stiffeners should extend from flange to flange.
TABLE E3
FACTOR g61 FOR SLENDERNESS COEFFICIENTS OF DIAPHRAGMS
WITH FREE EDGES
Factor g61
Plywood layup*
= 0° = 90°
t po / t
tpi = 0.5
3 ply 1.8 0.75
5 or more plies 1.1 0.91
t po / t
tpi = 1.0
3 ply 2.2 0.83
t po / t
tpi = 1.5
3 ply 2.3 0.87
* All plies assumed
assumed to be of the same
same species; all
all inner plies assumed
assumed to be of equal thickness
thickness..
t po / t
t pi = ratio of thickness of outer to inner plies.
NOTE:
NOTE: For
For direct
direction
ion of
of , see
see Figure
Figure E2.
E2.
75 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE E4
FACTOR g62 FOR EFFECTIVE BUCKLING WIDTH
OF CONCENTRATED LOADS
Factor g61
Plywood layup*
= 0° = 90°
t po / tpi = 0.5
3 ply 1.54 0.65
t po / tpi = 1.0
3 ply 1.93 0.52
t po / tpi = 1.5
3 ply 2.12 0.47
AS 1720.1—1988 76
APPENDIX F
CONNECTIONS FOR ROUND TIMBERS
For the case of standard connectors the recommendations given in Section 4 of this Standard are
applicable.
NOTE: Information on non-standard connectors will be given in AS 1720.3.
77 AS 1720.1—1988
APPENDIX G
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION—
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
G1 SPECIAL LAMINATION FACTOR. Laboratory tests have indicated that a special lamination factor
related to local reinforcement effects may be applicable to some species of timber. This lamination factor,
denoted by k 30, applies where the stress grade of a lamination is limited solely by local defects such as
knots, holes, gum pockets and localized grain distortion, and the local slope of grain does not exceed 1
in 10. Test data show that carefully selected radiata pine, Douglas fir and hoop pine laminations fulfil
these necessary conditions.
Values of the special lamination factor k 30 are given in Table G1. Subject to the grade limitations
specified, this alternative lamination factor k 30 may be used instead of the factor k 23 given in Clause 7.3.2
for modifying the basic stress in bending and tension.
TABLE G1
SPECIAL LAMINATION FACTOR
Lamination Factor k30 for special grades*
thickness
mm L1 L2 L3 L4
50 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20

40 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.25
30 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30
25 1.00 1.15 1.25 1.35
20 1.00 1.15 1.25 1.40
15 1.00 1.15 1.30 1.45
10 1.00 1.20 1.35 1.55
5 1.00 1.25 1.45 1.70
* Special lamination grades correspond to the following grades with the special limitation that the slope of
grain does not exceed 1 in 10:
L1 special grade = Structural Grade No 1 (75 percent grade)
L4 special grade = Structural Grade No 4 (38 percent grade).
NOTES:
1. Typical examples of species that usually satisfy the requirements for application of the special
lamination factor k 30 are radiata pine, Douglas fir and hoop pine.
2. The factor k 30 is applied to the basic working stresses for solid timber and is intended to account for
the effects of glue laminating. Hence it is apparent that it is not used when the basic working stresses
of glulam elements have been derived directly through the testing of such glulam elements.
G2 DESIGN STRENGTH OF BUTT JOINTS.

G2.1 General. The nominal tension stress ( f t) and shear stress ( f s) at a butt joint (computed on the gross
cross-section) shall comply with the requirements in Paragraphs G2.2 and G2.3.
G2.2 Tension members and horizontally laminated beams.
(a) For outermost laminations —
[( f t√t )/(7F sj)] ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Gl)
(b) For inner laminations —
[( f t√t )/(10F sj)] + [( f s√t )/(1.7F sj)] ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (G2)
Fsj = k1 k2 k5 k6 k12 k33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (G3)
where
t = lamination thickness, in millimetres
k 33 = 1.00 when there are four or fewer butt joints located in zones of maximum stress,
= 1.3/(n0.2) when the number (n) of butt joints in zones of maximum stress exceeds four.
and the factors k 1 to k 12 are defined in Sections 2 and 3.
The factor k 12 need not be applied in the case of tension members, nor in the case of beams when the butt
joint under consideration is outside the middle third of the beam.
AS 1720.1—1988 78
G2.3 Vertically laminated beams.

(a) For outermost laminations d —
[( f t√t )/(15F sj)] ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (G4)
(b) For inner laminations —
[( f t√t )/(20F sj)] ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (G5)
where F sj is derived according to Equation G3.
G2.4 Columns. For columns which have a stability factor k 12 < 0.5, a check shall be made that the butt
joint strength is adequate to resist a stress distribution that varies linearly from a compression stress of
k 1F c at one face to a tension stress k 1F c(1 - 2k 12) at the other. It is assumed that any face may receive the
tension stress. The parameters F c, k 1 and k 12 refer to the normal design compression stress, duration factor
and stability factor for the design of a glulam column.
G2.5 Conditions of use. Condition for the use of butt joints shall be as follows:
(a) In members designed as straight beams and the straight portions of structural members containing
curves.
(b) The design working stresses given above may be used only if butt joints within any set of four
adjacent laminations are spaced at least six lamination thicknesses (6t ) apart. However, if the
allowable design working stresses are taken to be 50 percent of those given above, then butt joints
in adjacent laminations may be placed as close as two lamination thicknesses apart.
NOTE: Many straight glued-laminated beams have a built-up camber. For the purpose of this code a glued-laminated beam may
be considered to be straight if the camber does not exceed 0.01 of the span.
79 AS 1720.1—1988
APPENDIX H
REFERENCED AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
AS
1111 ISO metric hexagon commercial bolts and screws
1143 High temperature creosote for the preservation of timber
1144 Arsenical creosote for the preservation of timber
1148 Nomenclature of commercial timbers imported into Australia
1170 SAA Loading Code
Part 1: Dead and live loads (AS 1170.1)
Part 2: Wind forces (AS 1170.2)
1328 Glued-laminated structural timber
1393 Coach screws (metric series) (with ISO hexagon heads)
1397 Hot-dipped zinc-coated or aluminimum/zinc-coated steel sheet in coil and cut lengths
1442 Carbon steels and carbon-manganese steels— Hot-rolled bars and semi-finished products
1491 Laminated and/or finger-jointed radiata pine scantlings
1476 Metric wood screws
1604 Preservative treatment for sawn timber, veneer and plywood
1605 Methods for the sampling and analysis of wood preservatives and preservative-treated wood
1649 Methods for the determination of basic working loads for metal fasteners for timber
1684 SAA Timber Framing Code
1694 Code of practice for physical barriers used in the protection of buildings against subterranean
termites
1748 Mechanically stress-graded timber
1749 Rules for mechanical stress grading of timber
2057 Soil treatment for buildings under construction for protection against subterranean termites
2082 Visually stress-graded hardwood for structural purposes
2209 Timber poles for overhead lines
2269 Structural plywood
2271 Plywood and blockboard for exterior use
2272 Marine plywood
2312 Guide to the protection of iron and steel against exterior atmospheric corrosion
2334 Steel nails —Metric series
2543 Nomenclature of Australian timbers
2754 Adhesives for timber and timber products
Part 1: Adhesives for plywood manufacture (AS 2754.1)
2858 Timber— Softwood —Visually stress-graded for structural purposes
2878 Timbers — Classification into strength groups
K55 Creosote oil for the preservation of timber
O1 Glossary of terms used in timber Standards
O80 Decking timbers from Eastern and South-eastern Australian hardwoods
O98 Seasoned size-matched framing timber (including finger-jointed pieces) from South-eastern
Australian hardwoods
ASTM
D143 Standard methods of testing small clear specimens of timber
BS
373 Methods of testing small clear specimens of timber
1579 Connectors for timber
AS 1720.1—1988 80
APPENDIX I
NOTATION AND FACTORS
This Appendix sets out the notation used in this Standard (see Table I1), lists the modification factors for
stiffness ( j) (see Table I2) and for strength ( k ) (see Table 13). Figure I1 below illustrates examples of
dimensional symbols used.
NOTE: sub = subscript indicating details of quantity.
FIGURE I1. ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES OF DIMENSIONAL SYMBOLS USED

81 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE I1
QUANTITY SYMBOLS
A = area of net cross-section
a = general dimension
b = breadth or width of member
bi = width of ith lamination
bi(eff) = effective width of ith lamination, Clause 7.4.5
c = general dimension, Figure 4.2
D = diameter of a metal fastener or pole
d = depth of member (see Figure I1)
d n = net depth of notched beam, Figure C8
d notch = notch depth, Figure C8
d W = depth of web of I-beam or box beam
E = modulus of elasticity
( EA) = effective axial rig idity
( EI )x = rigidity in bending about x-axis
E B I B = flexural rigidity of a single beam
E c I c = flexural rigidity of a single crossing member
( EI )y = rigidity in bending about y-axis
E i = modulus of elasticity of ith lamination
E o = modulus of elasticity of outermost lamination, Clause 7.4.5
EMC = equilibrium moisture content
ETL = equivalent test load, Paragraphs A4.1 and A5.1
F = permissible design stress
F ′ = basic working stress
= permissible stress for timber at moisture content less than 15%, Clause 2.5.2
= permissible stress for timber at moisture content greater than 15%, Clause 2.5.2
F b = permissible design stress in bending
= basic working stress in bending

F bx = permissible design stress in bending about x-axis
F by = permissible design stress in bending about y-axis
F c = permissible design stress in compression parallel to grain
= basic working stress in compression parallel to grain

F cb = permissible design value of f cb if no other stresses are present, Paragraph E2.2.5
= basic bolt bearing stress along grain, Paragraph D3.2

F co = permissible design compressive stress for stable columns
F cx = permissible compression stress for member as a column able to buckle about the x-axis only
F cy = permissible compression stress for member as a column able to buckle about the y-axis only
= basic working stress in compression at an angle θ to the grain

F o = permissible design stress for stable members
F p = permissible design stress for bearing perpendicular to grain
= basic working stress for bearing perpendicular to grain
= basic bolt bearing stress perpendicular to the grain, Paragraph D3.2

F s = permissible design stress for shear in beams
= basic working stress for shear in beams

F sj = permissible design stress for shear in joint details
= basic working stress for shear at joint details

F t = permissible design stress in tension
= basic working stress for tension parallel to grain

f = nominal applied stress
f b = applied nominal stress in bending
f bx = applied nominal stress in bending about x-axis
f by = applied nominal stress in bending about y-axis
f c = applied nominal stress in compression parallel to grain
f cb = applied compression stress due to edgewise bending on a plywood diaphragm,
Paragraph E2.2.1
f p = applied nominal stress for bearing perpendicular to grain
f s = applied nominal stress for shear in beams
f sj = applied nominal stress for shear in joint details
f t = applied nominal stress for tension parallel to grain
(continued )
AS 1720.1—1988 82
TABLE I1 (continued )
G = modulus of rigidity
GJ = torsional rigidity
g = modification factor for geometry effects
h = modification factor for material and load characteristics
hB, hc = E B I B / L3, E c I c / s3
I = second movement of area (moment of inertia)
J = St Venant torsion constant
j = modification factor applied to stiffness
K A, K B = stiffness, Paragraph C7.1
K sec = secant modulus of a joint, Paragraph D2.1
k = modification factor applied to strength
L = length of column or span of beam
Laφ = distance between points of effectively rigid rotational restraints
Lax = distance between points of effectively rigid restraints against lateral movement in y-direction
Lay = distance between points of effectively rigid restraints against lateral movement in x-direction
Lch = characteristic length in buckling of plywood webs, Paragraph E2.2.1
lb = bearing length of range of I-beam or box beam, Figure E3
leff = effective compression width, Figure E3
lnotch = notch length, Figure C8
lpar = end distance, Clause 4.4.2.5
M , M a = applied bending moment
M cr = critical elastic buckling moment
M n = in-plane moment capacity of multiple connector joint, Clause 4.2.1.2
M x = applied bending moment, about x-axis
M y = applied bending moment, about y-axis
m = number of members supported by each restraint system, Paragraph C7.2
n = number of items
nL = effective number of laminations
na = number of fasteners or rows of fasteners, Table 4.2(A) and 4.2(B), Table 4.11
nc = number of crossing members in a grid system
ncon = number of connectors
neff = effective number of elements in a load-sharing system
nm = total number of members in a load-sharing system
P = applied load or force
PD = dead load
PL = live load
PR = force acting on lateral restraint
PW = wind load
Pcr = elastic buckling load
Peff = effective point load, Paragraph C8.2
Pn = direct load capacity of a multiple connector joint, Clause 4.2.1.2
Q = permissible load capacity of a single fastener
Qs = permissible load for a laterally loaded bolt system, Clause 4.4.2.4
= basic load capacity
= basic load for a single bolt in bearing along the grain
= basic load for a single bolt in bearing perpendicular to the grain
= basic working load of a laterally loaded bolt system, Clause 4.4.2.3
= basic load capacity of a bolted joint system loaded parallel to the grain direction
= basic load capacity of a bolted joint system loaded perpendicular to the grain direction
r = temporary load/total load, Tables 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 3.6
r i = distance to ith nail, Clause 4.2.1.2
r max = distance to the farthest nail, Clause 4.2.1.2
S = slenderness coefficient
S max = slenderness coefficient if there are no restraints
S min = slenderness coefficient if the restraints are effectively rigid
s = centre-to-centre spacing of supporting members in a grid system
T = torque load
T R = torque acting in lateral restraint
t = thickness of timber (see Figure I1)
t 1, t 2, t 3, t 4 = thickness of timber in bolted joint, Table 4.9(A) and Table 4.10(A)
t f = flange thickness of I-beam or box beam Figure E3
(continued )
83 AS 1720.1—1988
TABLE I1 (continued )
t i = thickness
thickness of first member
member of a two-member
two-member joint
t m = thickness
thickness of member of a nailed joint,
joint, Figure
Figure 4.2
t o = thickness
thickness of member of a nailed joint,
joint, Figure
Figure 4.2 and Figure D1
t p = depth of nail penetration
penetration into second member
member of a two member
member joint or a third member of a
three member joint, Figure 4.2 and Figure D1
t pi = thickne
thicknessss of an inner ply of plywood
plywood
t po = thickness
thickness of outermost
outermost ply of plywood
t s = thickness
thickness of spaced column
column member, Figure
Figure C4
t w = thickne
thicknessss of web of I-beam or box beam
t w = thickness
thickness of timber member,
member, Figure D1D1
V = applied
applied shear force
w = applied
applied uniformly distribut
distributed
ed load
weff = effective
effective uniformly
uniformly distributed
distributed load, Clause 6.6.3
x = cartesian
cartesian coordinate
coordinate
y = cartesian
coordinate
ye = distance
distance from column centroid to point of load application,
application, Figure
Figure C3
yh = height above beam centroid
centroid of the point of load application,
application, Figure C2
yo = distance
distance of lateral restraint
restraint below the neutral
neutral axis, Figure C2 and C3
Z x = section
section modulus about
about x-axis
Z y = section
section modulus about
about y-axis
z = cartesian
coordinate
α = parameter
parameter related to tendency
tendency to split, Clause 4.1.4
α1 = parameter
parameter defined
defined C7.3.1
α2 = parameter
parameter defined
defined C7.4.1
γ = tangential
tangential cleavage,
cleavage, N/mm
N/mm
∆ = deflection
deflection
∆i = initial
initial displacement
displacement of connector
connector
= rotation
rotation
ε = tangential
tangential shrinkage,
shrinkage, percent
percent
= material
material constant
constant Tables 3.3, C1, C2,
C2, C3, C4
* = material constant, when k11 < 1.0, Clause 3.2.4
= angle between
between the direction of the load and the direction
direction of the grain
TABLE I2
MODIFICATION FACTORS FOR STIFFNESS ( j
j)
Factor Definition Text reference
Section 2
j2 Factor for duration of load for bending, compression and shear 2.5.1.2
j3 Factor for duration of load for tension 2.5.1.2
Section 5
j6 Factor for moisture content of plywood 5.4.2
Section 6
j9 Factor for immaturity of round timbers 6.4.1
Appendix D
j12 Factor for duration of load on nailed and screwed joints D2.2
j13 Factor for duration of load on nailed and screwed joints D2.2
j14 Factor for duration of load on split ring connectors and shear-plate
connectors D2.3
AS 1720.1—1988 84
TABLE I3
MODIFICATION FACTORS FOR STRENGTH ( k)
Factor Definition Text reference
Section 2
k 0 Factor for load sharing in grid systems 2.5.5.3
k 1 Factor for load duration 2.5.1.1
k 4 Factor for partial seasoning of nominally unseasoned timber 2.5.2
k 5 Factor for high moisture content of seasoned timber 2.5.2
k 6 Factor
Factor for temperature/hu
temperature/humidity
midity effect 2.5.3
k 7 Factor for bearing length 2.5.4
k 8 Factor for load sharing in parallel structural systems 2.5.5.2
k 11 Factor for load sharing in grid systems 2.5.5.3
k 12 Factor for member size 2.5.6
Factor
Factor for instability
instability 2.5.7
Section 4
k 13 Factor for end grain effects 4.2.1.2, 1.3.1.2,
4.3.2.2, 4.5.3.2
k 14 Factor for effect of double shear 4.2.1.2
k 15 Factor for effect of seasoning of timber 4.6.3
k 16 Factor for plywood or metal side plates 4.2.1.2
k 17 Factor for multiple connector effect 4.2.1.2, 4.3.1.2,
4.4.2.4, 4.6.3
k 18 Factor for effect of tension loads 4.6.3, 4.7.3
Section 5
k 19 Moisture content of plywood 5.4.2
Section 6
k 20 Factor
Factor for timber immaturity
immaturity 6.4.1
k 21 Factor for effect of shaving 6.4.2
Section 7
k 23 Factor for load sharing effect of laminating 7.3.2.1
Appendix A
k 26 Factor related to design load duration A.4.1
k 27 Factor for duration of test A.4.1
k 28 Factor for effect of sample size A.5.4
Appendix G
k 30 Special lamination factor G1.1
k 33 Factor for multiple butt joints G2.2
NOTES:
1. In the design of solid timber
timber beams, the following are the modification
modification factors usually considered:
considered:
For bending strength: k 1 k 8 k 11 k 12
For shear strength:
strength: k 1
For end bearing: k 1 k 7
For deflection: j2
2. In the design of solid timber

timber columns, the following
following are the strength modification
modification factors usually
usually
considered:
k 1 k 12
3. In the design of glued-laminat

glued-laminated
ed members,
members, the modification
modification factors to be considered are usually
usually those for
solid timber beams and columns together with the following:
k 23 or k 30
85 AS 1720.1—1988
INDEX
ITEM REFERENCE ITEM REFERENCE

Notation App. I, Table II
Acceptance testing App. A Notched members
—beams C9
Basic working stress 1.8.2, 2.3 —columns C10
Basic working load, connectors 1.8.2 —tension members C11
Beams
—general 3.2, C3 Permissible stress 1.8.2
—glued-laminated Sect. 7, app. G Plywood
—notched C9 —basic design properties Sect. 5
—solid rectangular 3.2 —buckling strength App. E
Bearing stresses 2.3, 2.5 —connectors D1
Bending stresses Pole timbers Sect. 6
—glued-laminated timber 7.2, App. G Proof testing A4
—plywood 5.2 Prototype testing A5
—poles 6.2 Referenced documents
—solid timber 2.3, 2.5, 3.2
Buckling restraints C3.2 Scope of code 1.1
butt joints G2 Shear stresses
—glued-laminated timber 7.2, App. G
Collapse susceptible timber 1.8.2 —plywood 5.2
Columns —poles 6.2
—general 3.3, C3 —solid timber 2.3, 2.5
—glued-laminated timber Sect. 7, app. G Spaced columns C6
—notched C10 Stability factor 2.5.7
—solid rectangular 3.3 Stiffness factors Table I2, app. I
Combined stresses Strength factors Table I3, app. I
—bending and axial compression 3.5.1 Stress
—bending and axial tension 3.5.2 —basic working 1.8.2, 2.3
Compression stresses parallel to the grain —bearing 2.3, 2.5
—glued-laminated timber 7.2, app. G —bending
—plywood 5.2 —glued-laminated timber 7.2, App. G
—poles 6.2 —plywood 5.2
—solid timber 2.3, 3.5, 3.3 —poles 6.2
Compression stresses perpendicular to the —solid timber 2.3, 2.5, 3.2
grain —combined
—glued-laminated timber 7.2, App. G —bending and axial compression 3.5.1
—plywood 5.2 —bending and axial tension 3.5.2
—solid timber 2.3, 2.5 —compression, parallel to the grain
Corewood 1.8.2 —glued-laminated timber 7.2, app. G
Creep factors —plywood 5.2
—connectors App. D —poles 6.2
—wood 2.5.1.2 —solid timber 2.3, 2.5, 3.2
—compression, perpendicular to the grain
Definitions 1.8 —glued-laminated timber 7.2, app. G
Deflections 1.5.3.6, 2.4.2 —plywood 5.2
Duration of load factor 2.5.1.1 —solid timber 2.3, 2.5
—permissible (definition) 1.8.2
Hankinson’s formula 2.3.3, 4.4.2.3 —shear
—glued-laminated timber 7.2, app. G
Joints —plywood 5.2
—bolted joints 4.4, D2, D3 —poles 6.2
—butt-joints G2 —solid timber 2.3, 2.5
coach screws 4.5 —tension
—joint deformations D2 —glued-laminated timber 7.2, app. G
—nailed joints 4.2, D1, D2 —plywood 5.2
—screwed joints 4.3, D2 —poles 6.2
—shear-plate connectors 4.7, D2.3 —solid timber 2.3, 2.5, 3.4
—split-ring connectors 4.6, D2.3 Temperature factor 2.5.3
Tendency to split 4.1.4
Load sharing 2.5.5 Tension members
Load tests App. A —general 3.4
—glued-laminated timber Sect. 7, App. G
Modification factors —notched C11
—stiffness Table I2, App. I Tension stresses
—strength Table I3, App. I —glued-laminated timber 7.2, App. G
Modulus of elasticity 2.3.4 —plywood 5.2
—glued-laminated timber 7.1, 7.4.5 —poles 6.2
—plywood 5.2 —solid timber 2.3, 2.5, 3.4
—poles 6.2
—solid timber 2.3 Washer sizes 4.4.2.6

As 1720 1988 Part 1 Timber Structures 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

As 1720 1988 Part 1 Timber Structures 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This Australian Standard was prepared by Committee

Committee TM/102, timber En gineering.

The following interests are represented on Committee TM/102:

This Standard was issued in draft form for comment as DR 83171.

SAA TIMBER STRUCTURES CODE

This Standard was prepared by the Association’s Committee on Timber Engineering

STANDARDS ASSOCIATION OF AUSTRALIA

1.5.2 Design methods. dama

1.7 WORKMANSHIP AND MAINTENANCE. long-d

TABLE 2.2 (continued )

TABLE 2.2 (continued )

TABLE 2.2 (continued)

Structural Structural Structural Structural Structural plywood(4) kg/m 3

TABLE 2.2 (continued)

— SD1 10.4 4.15

— SD1 10.4 4.15

S1 SD4 6.6 2.45

S4 SD7 3.3 1.45

Multiplying factor ( k1)

Medium term 5 days 1.65 1.35

For bending, compression and For tension members

RELATIVE SPACING ( s/L)

For restraint systems that are continuous along the

3.3 COLUMN DESIGN. length

3.3 COLUMN DESIGN. length

where 3.5 COMBINED B E ND ING A ND A XIA L

f bx - f t ≤ Fbx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.2

4.2.1.2 Permissible loads. The permissible load Q of a where

4.2.2.2 Permissible loads. The permissible load Q of a k 16 = 1.2

TABLE 4.7 Reference shall be made to Paragraph D3, Appendix D for

1. Two member Smaller of t

2. Three member Smaller

3. Multiple member (i) Between A and B—

TABLE 4.9(C) (continued )

1. Two member 2t 1

2. Three member, Type A t 2

3. Three member, Type B 2t 1

4. Multiple member (i) — t 2

TABLE 4.10(C) (continued )

Seasoned timber 1.0 1.0 1. 0 1.0 1 .0

Unseasoned timber (transverse 0.5 0.5 0. 5 0.5 0. 5

(a) For the purpos

TABLE 4.14(C) = factor

4.6 SPLIT-RING CONNECTORS. 4.7 SHEAR PLATE CONNECTORS.

F34 34.5 20.7 2.30 25.9 10.4 21 500 1 075

= basic working stress for extreme fibre in

TABLE 5.3 ( continued )

Stress direction with Assembly factor

±45° Full area of contact between 0.2 × basic shear stress

D = pole diameter at mid-length, mm.

6.2(B) IMMATURITY FACTOR j 9 FOR STIFFNESS

Factor k20 for stresses

D = pole diameter at mid-length, mm.

7.4.2.3 Spacing of end joints. where

Factor k 27 for bending and tension strength

1 1.8 2.8 4.3

4 1.5 2.0 2.8

100 1.0 1.0 1.0

A5.5 Test procedure.

A7 USE OF TESTED STRUCTURES. Any unit tested in accordance with Paragraphs A4

CSIRO Division of Building Research, Melbourne, 1972.

BOLZA, E. and KLOOT, N.H. The mechanical

C1 SCOPE. This Appendix extends